Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutVI (C) Award to Mitchell Builders for Phase 3 for Withers-Maguire House AGENDA 2-21-95 °COG@ Item VI C "CENTER OF GOOD LIVING-PRIDE OF WEST ORANGE" S.SCU I YANur.KL,Klr COMMISSIONERS RUSTY JOHNSON CITY OF OCOEE PAUL W.FOSTER 150 N.LAKESHORE DRIVE SCOTT A.GLASS OCOEE,FLORIDA 34761-2258JIM GLEASON (407)656-2322 CITY MANAGER ELLIS SHAPIRO MEMORANDUM DATE: February 16, 1995 TO: The Honorable Mayor and Board of City Commissioners FROM: Montye E. Beamer, Director Administrative Services SUBJECT: Withers Maguire House Phase 3 At the December 20, 1994 Commission Meeting staff was authorized to negotiate an acceptable bid for Phase 3 (Interior) with the prequalified Mitchell Building Contractors. The Contractor and Architect spent a good deal of time in the on-site analysis of the work to be performed. Mitchell received quotes from at least three sub-contractors for the various trades necessary. His proposal is attached along with clarification on work to be accomplished and work to be considered alternates. The repairs associated with the fireplaces do not make any of them safe for actual use; the chimneys, for example, would also require rebuilding which is extremely costly but would be the only way any sub-contractor would guarantee work. As a public building, it is best not to have fires in any fireplace. Unattended these can create potential hazard the likes of which would destroy the entire house. Monies for the project would be as follows: State Grant $180,000.00 001-11-511-4620 14,000.00 (Withers-Maguire House) 001-18-518-6302 12,065.00 Above Ground Tanks Redesignated of Capital - Mid-Year $206,065.00 �3 The Honorable Mayor and Board of City Commissioners February 16, 1995 Page Two The project manual is available in the City Clerk's office. Should you have any questions, please give me a call. Monies now being raised by the Historical Commission will be utilized to furnish certain rooms; some of the original furniture may only be retrieved through purchase. Donations are being received for other rooms, and the Historical Commission will be requesting the City Commission to approve the plaque to be placed in these completely donated, furnished rooms. Staff recommends that the Mayor and City Commission (1) accept the modifications to the project manual as detailed by Earle Mitchell in his letter dated February 10, 1995 (including the deletion of any working fireplaces), (2) approve the contract with Mitchell Building Contractors, Inc. in the amount of$206,065.00 to be completed in 150 days for Renovation to the Withers-Maguire House Phase 3, and (3) authorize the Mayor and City Clerk to execute. MEB/jbw Attachments WPSADOCS\wsmause.m3\I5Pe895W es Mitchell & rj9 eonbtactozs,_One. &E i/fed gerzytar eonktaciat RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE, PHASE 3 16 EAST OAKLAND AVENUE OCOEE, FLORIDA February 10 , 1995 Scope of Work; As per plan and specifications with the following clarifications- ( 1 ) Window hardware type A, is to be purchased at Antique Hardware Store, item No. 18W2 . ( 2 ) Painting, strip completely only those areas that are to be natural finished. ( 3 ) H.V.A.C. , ductwork is to be fibre duct in lieu of metal , test and balancing can be done in - house. ( 4 ) Plaster sand finished on second floor can remain. ( 5 ) Screen installation is by others . ( 6 ) Fireplaces are to be cleaned, tuck pointed, damaged facing removed and replaced, brick facing removed and replaced matching previous , painted only. ( 7 ) Construction schedule of 150 days is anticipated. Sub Total $201 , 039 . 00 Bond 5 , 026 . 00 Base Bid $206 , 065 . 00 Alternates : ( 1 ) H.V.A.C. , install metal duct in lieu of fibre duct, Add $4 , 961 .00 ( 2 ) Fireplaces , replace fire box veneer, replace damaged facings , replace damaged hearths and box floors , Add $3 , 784. 00 Res A - - bmitted, _arle W. Mitchell President Mitchell Building Contractors , Inc. CGC017002 EWM/pld 75 GV.aunt=ofvEriuz • dttando,¶Ca.ida 32805 • (407)841-6882 • ¶ax(407)841-7607 CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 199_, by and between the CITY OF OCOEE, Florida, a municipal corporation of the State of Florida, party of the first part (hereinafter sometimes called the "CITY"), and MITCHELL BUILDING CONTRACTORS INC. , Party of the second part, (hereinafter sometimes called the "CONTRACTOR"). WITNESSETH: The parties hereto, for the considerations hereinafter set forth, mutually agree as follows: Article 1. Scope of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and deliver all labor, materials, and equipment and perform all the work in a satisfactory and workman like manner, required to complete the project entitled RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 in strict and entire conformity with the Plans, Technical Specifications and other Contract Documents, which are duly approved by the CITY and which said Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents are hereby made part of this Agreement as fully and with the same effects as if the same had been set forth at length in the body of this Agreement. Article 2. The Contract Sum: The CITY shall pay to the CONTRACTOR for the said work, when fully completed, and subject to the additions and deductions provided in the Contract Documents, the total Bid Price of TWO HUNDRED SIX THOUSAND SIXTY FIVE and NO/1 00 Dollars($ 206 , 065 . 00 ). Article 3. Partial and Final Payments: In accordance with the provisions set forth in the "General Conditions", and subject to additions and deductions as provided, the CITY shall pay the CONTRACTOR as follows: a. On the 8th day, or the first business day thereafter, of each calendar month, the CITY shall make partial payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of a certified approved estimate of work performed during the preceding calendar month by the CONTRACTOR (submitted by the 1st of the month), less ten percent (10%) of the amount of such estimate which is to be retained by the CITY until all work has been performed strictly in accordance with the Agreement and until such work has been accepted by the CITY. b. Final payment on account of this Agreement shall be made within thirty (30) days after completion by the CONTRACTOR of all work covered by this Agreement and acceptance of such work by the CITY, if the CONTRACTOR has submitted evidence satisfactory to the CITY that all payrolls, material bills and other costs incurred by C-1 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract the CONTRACTOR in connection with the construction of the Work have been paid in full, and also, after all guarantees that may have be required in the Specifications have been furnished and found to be acceptable by the CITY. Article 4. Time of Completion: The Contractor shall commence work to be performed under this Contract within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after date of written Notice to Proceed and shall fully complete the Contract in One Hundred and Twenty (120) calendar days after said date of written notice, as may be modified in the Notice to Proceed. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence and in the event that construction of the Work is not completed within the Contract Time, as may have been modified in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of this Contract, that from the compensation otherwise to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, the CITY is authorized and shall retain, for each day thereafter, Sundays and holidays included, the sum of Fifty Dollars ($50) as liquidated damages sustained by the CITY in the event of such default by the CONTRACTOR, or shall withhold such compensation for actual and consequential damages as may be stated therein or contemplated therefrom. Article 5. The CONTRACTOR agrees to make payment of all proper charges for labor and materials required in the aforementioned work, and to defend, indemnify and save harmless the CITY and all its officers, agents, and servants, and each and every one of them against and from all suits and costs of every kind and description, and from all damages to which the said CITY or any of their officers, agents or servants may be put, by reason of injury or death to the persons or injury to property of others resulting from the performance of said work, or through the negligence of the CONTRACTOR, or through improper or defective machinery, implements or appliances used by the CONTRACTOR in the aforesaid work, or through any act or omission on the part of the CONTRACTOR, or his agent or agents, employees or servants. Article 6. It is also mutually agreed and understood that the acceptance of the final payment by the CONTRACTOR shall be considered as a release in full of all claims against the CITY or any of its members or agents, arising out of, or by reason of, work done and materials furnished under this Contract. Article 7. Additional Bond: It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto, that if, at any time after the execution of this Agreement and the Performance and Payment Bonds hereto attached for its faithful performance, the CITY shall deem the surety or sureties upon such bond to be unsatisfactory, or, if for any reason, such bond ceases to be adequate to cover the performance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, within five (5) days after receipt of notice from the City to do so, furnish C-2 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the CITY. In such event, no further payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to be due under this Agreement until such new or additional security for the faithful performance of the work shall be furnished in a manner and form satisfactory to the CITY. Article 8. Contract Documents: All of the documents listed below form the Contract and they are as fully a part of the Contract as hereto attached, or repeated in this Agreement. 1. Bid Advertisement 7. Payment Bond 2. Instructions to Bidders 8. General Conditions 3. Bid Form 9. Supplementary General Conditions 4. Bid Bond 10. Technical Specifications 5. Contract 11. Drawings 6. Performance Bond 12. Addenda The Contract is to be binding upon the CITY, its successor,or successors and upon the CONTRACTOR (and his heirs, administrator, administrators, or assignees and its successor, successors, and assigns), and is voidable and may be terminated by the CITY, in accordance with the provisions of the Specifications relative thereto are not complied with. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the date first above written in five (5) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for the other counterparts, be deemed an original contract. CITY OF OCOEE, FLORIDA Party of the First Part BY: (Seal) Mayor ATTEST: By: City Clerk Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: Wt a es: CONTRACTOR r.r. � jc____, // ' i, / +lleitISS Ir. I _ . B / . /�� P rl As to the Party of the Second Part C-3 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract Approved as to Form: Approved as to Finance: By: By: City Attorney Director of Finance CERTIFICATE STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ORANGE ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Board of Directors of Mitchell Building Contractors, Inc. , a corporation under the laws of the State of Florida , was held on February 13 . 1995, and the following: "Resolved, that Earle W. Mitchell as President of the corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Contract dated , 199_, between the CITY OF OCOEE, a municipal corporation, and the corporation, and that his execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of the corporation and with the corporate seal affixed, shall be the official act and deed of this corporation." I further certify that said resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the official seal of the corporation, this /y day of /24",./4,x,y , 199.E cretary �i✓ C-4 Mitchell Buiiciin9 eonfzc ozs,gne. [.:E'LELfLLd gErzzud C.:oIbutafo'C February 13 , 1995 Ms. Montye E. Beamer Director of Finance City of Ocoee Re: Renovations To The Withers-Maguire House Phase 3 Fireplace Reconstruction Dear Ms . Beamer, After a careful and thoughtful investigation we have came to the conclusion that any attempt to use the fireplaces may be hazardous to the structure. As discussed, we therefore eliminated rebuilding the fireboxes, hearths, dampers, etc. , from our scope of work. Res.- President Mitchell Building Contractors , Inc. EWM/mdm 15 d1!gam/2a ogvEJ mE • 01101U10,9iotida 32805 • (407)841-6882 • ¶ax(407)841-1607 Mitchell _Budding eonbtadozs.,�ne. evaifi d gEnvcat Coniwarlos RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE, PHASE 3 16 EAST OAKLAND AVENUE OCOEE, FLORIDA February 13 , 1995 Schedule of Values Project Start-up 16 , 218 Demolition 21 , 272 Insulation 8 , 760 Plaster-Prep 9 , 426 Finish 5 , 978 Drywall 2, 096 Tile-Prep 988 Finish 1 , 935 Fireplace Rehab 1 , 789 Vinyl-Prep 303 Finish 192 Carpentry Frame 1 , 236 Finish 7 , 850 Doors/Hardware 5 , 584 Windows/Hardware 4 , 627 Painting-Prep 10 , 213 Finish 15 , 318 Floor Refinish 4 , 800 Handicap Ramp 5 , 284 Misc. Specialties 840 Plumbing 3 , 450 H.V.A.C. 29 , 900 Electrical 27 , 600 General Conditions 20 , 406 206 , 065 �5 dV gamza c ntzt e • CD'ct'anda,¶L''o ida 32805 • (407)841-6882 • Sfax(407)841-1607 BID FORM WHEN THE BIDDER IS A CORPORATION: Mitchell Building Contractors Inc. (Name of Corporation) By: Earle W. Mitchell (Seal) President (Official Title) Bidder's Mailing Address: Mitchell Building Cont. Inc. 15 N. Tampa Ave. Orlando, FL 32805 Phone Number: 841 -6882 Certification Number: CGC 017002 Organized under the laws of the State of Florida , and authorized by the law to make this bid and perform all Work and furnish materials and equipment required under the Contract Documents. CERTIFIED COPY OF RESOLUTION OF BOARD OF DIRECTORS Mitchell Building Contractors Inc. (Name of Corporation) RESOLVED That Earle W. Mitchell Of Mitchell Building Contractors Inc. (Person Authorized to Sign) (Name of Corporation) be authorized to sign and submit the Bid of this corporation for the Project referenced above. The foregoing is a true and correct copy of the resolution adopted by Mitchell Building Contractors Inc. fName of Corporation) at a meeting of =- : .f Directors held on the /0 day of / 4&44*7 , 19 r2�� By: 41 Title: t, oft The above Resolution MUST BE COMPLETED if the Bidder is a corporation. BF-4 • BID FORM INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement may cause rejection. Additional sheets shall be attached as required. 1. Contractor's Name and Address: Mitchell Building Contractors Inc. 15 N. Tampa Ave. Orlando, Florida 32805 2. Contractor's Telephone Number: 407-841-688 2 3. Contractor's License Number: CGC 017002 Primary Classification: Class A General Contractor Orange County Ucense Number: fgn) 000/j,7g Ocoee Certificate of Competency Number(If obtained): o/oOC' 4. Number of years involved in construction work of the type involved in this Contract: 35+ 5. List of Names and Titles of all officers of Contractor's Firm. Earle W. Mitchell President John M. Ditsler Vice President/Secretary 6. Name of person who inspected the site for your firm. Name: Earle W. Mitchell/John M. Ditsler Date of Inspection: February 1-8 , 1995 Note: If requested by the City, the Bidder shall furnish a notarized financial statement, references and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of the Bidder's current financial condition. BF-5 PROJECT MANUAL RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE PHASE 3 16 East Oakland Avenue Ocoee, Florida CITY OF OCOEE PROJECT NO. 9104 SEPTEMBER 1994 Project Architect CHALMERS YEILDING ARCHITECT 315 EAST ROBINSON STREET, SUITE 505 ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32801 (407) 423-4919 Renovations to the WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 Ocoee, Florida TABLE OF CONTENTS Contentg Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-4 AB ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS AB-1 IB INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS IB-1 1. Scope of Work IB-1 2. Preparation of Bids IB-1 3. Signature of Bidder IB-1 4. Receipt and Opening of Bids IB-1 5. Bid Guarantee IB-1 6. Power of Attorney 1B-2 7. Contract Documents IB-2 8. Responsibility of Bidder to Inform Himself as to All Conditions IB-2 9. Interpretation of Contract Documents IB-2 10. Basis for Bidding IB-3 11. Life and Withdrawal of Bid IB-3 12. Qualifications and Disqualifications of Bidders IB-3 13. Award of Contract IB-4 14. Withdrawal of Bid IB-4 15. Return of Bid Guarantees IB-4 16. Guaranty of Faithful Performance and Payment IB-4 17. Insurance IB-5 18. Building Department Registration IB-5 19. Execution of Contract IB-5 20. Failure to Execute Contract, Bid Guarantee Forfeited IB-5 21. Time Allowed IB-6 22. Building Permits IB-6 23. Sunshine Act IB-6 BID FORM BF-1 thru BF-5 BID BOND BB-1 thru BB-2 CONTRACT C-1 thru C-4 PERFORMANCE BOND PB-1 thru PB-6 PAYMENT BOND PA-1 thru PA-6 GENERAL CONDITIONS GC-1 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-1 thru SGC-24 1 Renovations to the WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 Ocoee, Florida DRAWINGS 1-14 FIRST FLOOR PLAN 1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 2 ATTIC FLOOR PLAN 3 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 4 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES 5 RAMP PLAN 6 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 7 FIRST FLOOR RESTROOM PLUMBING PLAN 8 KITCHEN PLUMBING PLAN 9 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 10 SECOND FLOOR RESTROOM PLAN 11 ATTIC PLUMBING PLAN 12 CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL 13 DRYWELL DETAIL 14 WATER HEATER DETAIL 15 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND RISER DIAGRAM 16 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN 17 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN 18 ATTIC MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN 19 HEAT PUMP SCHEDULE 20 VENTILATOR AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULES 21 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN 22 SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN 23 ATTIC ELECTRICAL PLAN 24 ROOF ELECTRICAL PLAN 25 ELECTRICAL POWER RISER DIAGRAM 26 ELECTRICAL NOTES 27 ELECTRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT CALCULATIONS 28 ELECTRICAL PANEL AC DIAGRAM 29 ELECTRICAL PANEL LA DIAGRAM 30 ELECTRICAL PANEL LB DIAGRAM 31 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 1 01027 Application For Payment 1-2 01040 Project Coordination 1 01300 Submittals 1-2 01500 Temporary Facilities 1-3 01700 Project Closeout 1-2 2 Renovations to the WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 Ocoee, Florida DIVISION 2 02070 Selective Demolition 1-2 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1-7 DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry 1-3 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 1-3 06200 Finish Carpentry 1-3 06401 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1-3 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 Insulation 1-3 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08212 Wood Doors 1-3 08610 Wood Windows 1-4 08710 Door Hardware 1-3 08800 Glass&Glazing 1-2 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09200 Lath & Plaster 1-5 09215 Veneer Plaster 1-4 09300 Tile 1-5 09550 Wood Flooring 1-2 09660 Vinyl Tile Flooring 1-3 09900 Painting 1-6 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES 10425 Signs & Plaques 1-2 10522 Fire Extinguishers 1 10800 Toilet & Bath Accessories 1-2 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical 1-4 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 1-3 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials 1-6 15055 Basic Piping Materials 1-3 15100 Valves 1-4 15140 Supports & Anchors 1-3 15250 Mechanical Insulation 1-7 3 Renovations to the WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 Ocoee, Florida 15411 Water Distribution Piping 1-7 15420 Drainage&Vent Systems 1-6 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 1-4 15460 Water Heaters 1-2 15530 Refrigerant Piping 1-4 15781 Packaged Units 1-4 15870 Power Ventilators 1-3 15891 Metal Ductwork 1-3 15910 Ductwork Accessories 1-4 15971 Electric Control Systems 1-4 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1-5 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16015 Electrical Reference Symbols 1-3 16020 Work Included 1 16025 Codes, Fees &Standards 1 16030 Test & Performance Verification 1 16031 Demonstration of Completed Systems 1 16040 Identification 1 16050 Special Requirements 1-5 16110 Raceways and Conduit 1-4 16120 Wire and Cables 1 16130 Outlet Boxes 1-2 16140 Wiring Devices 1 16190 Supporting Devices 1 16410 Electric Service 1-2 16450 Grounding 1 16470 Panelboards 1-2 16475 Overcurrent Protection Devises 1-2 16490 Disconnects 1 16500 Security System 1 16501 Lighting Fixtures 1-3 16940 Lightning Protection 1-2 4 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 for the CITY OF OCOEE, FLORIDA NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City Commission of the City of Ocoee, Florida is advertising for sealed bids from Contractors who have been prequalified for the above identified project. Bids to be received at the office of the Director of Administrative Services, 150 N. Lakeshore Drive, Ocoee, Florida 34761, not later than , at which time all bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the City Hall Conference Room, 150 N. Lakeshore Drive, Ocoee, Florida, for the performance of the following work: Renovations to the Withers-Maguire House 16 East Oakland Avenue, Ocoee, Florida On or after , copies of Instructions to Bidders, Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents may be examined or obtained at the office of the Director of Administrative Services by payment of $25.00 for each set. Payment for complete Construction Document sets must be made in cash or by check or money order payable to the "City of Ocoee". No partial sets will be sold. Deposit is refundable upon return of documents, in usable condition, within ten (10) days after bid date. No construction documents will be issued after the date of the prebid conference. Bidders are requested to submit bids for the above on the Bid Forms provided. Bidders must submit bids for all items of work shown on the Bid Form. No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids for a period of thirty (30) days. Bids received after the time and date specified will not be considered and will be returned unopened. No facsimile or telegraphic submissions will be accepted. A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the Withers-Maguire House located at 16 East Oakland Avenue, Ocoee, Florida, at Each bid must be accompanied by a Bid Security, in an amount no less than five percent (5) of the base bid amount. Said security shall be in the form of a certified or cashier's check on a solvent National or State Bank payable to the City of Ocoee, or a bid Bond executed by the Bidder and a qualified Surety, satisfactory and payable to the City of Ocoee, Florida. A Performance and Payment Bond in a sum equal to 100% of the amount of the Contract awarded will be required. The City of Ocoee reserves the rights to waive informalities in any bid, to reject any or all bids with or without cause, and/or to accept the bid that in its best judgement will be in the best interests of the City of Ocoee, Florida. Dated this day of , 1994. CITY OF OCOEE, FLORIDA Montye Beamer, Director of Administrative Services AB-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Scope of work: The work to be performed under this contract consists of furnishing all equipment, labor, materials and everything necessary and required to: Complete renovations to the Withers-Maguire House as described in the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents. 2. Preparation of Bids: Each bid shall be submitted on a copy of the Bid Form included herein which shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of a conflict, words will take precedence. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 3. Signature of Bidder: The Bidder shall sign the Bid Form in the space provided for the signature. If the Bidder is an individual, both the firm's name, if different from the individual's name, and the individual's business address shall be given. In the case of partnership, the signature of at least one of the partners shall follow the firm name and the words, "Partner", should be written beneath such signature. In addition, the partnership's business address and the names of the other partners shall be shown beneath the signature. If the Bidder is a corporation, the title of the officer signing the Bid in behalf of the corporation shall be stated and evidence of his authority to sign the Bid shall be submitted. The corporate seal must be affixed and the corporate address and state of incorporation shall be given. When the state of incorporation is other than Florida, proof of registry with Florida must be attached. 4. Receipt and Opening of Bids:The Bid Form and Bid Guarantee shall be submitted in a sealed, opaque envelope marked "Withers-Maguire House Renovations" addressed to Montye Beamer, Director of Administrative Services, City of Ocoee, Florida by the time called for in the Advertisement for Bids. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the time and place specified in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders or their authorized agents are invited to be present. Bids received after the time and date specified in the Advertisement for Bids will not be considered and will be returned unopened. No Bid will be considered which is not based upon these Drawings and Specifications, or which contains any letter or written memorandum qualifying the same, or which is not properly made out and signed in writing by the Bidder. 5. Bid Guarantee: A certified or cashier's check on a national or state bank, or a bid bond executed by a surety acceptable to the City of Ocoee, hereinafter referred to as the Owner, for not less than five percent (5%) of the amount of the Base Bid, made payable to the City of Ocoee, shall accompany each bid as guarantee that the Bidder will, if awarded the contract, promptly enter into agreement to do the work and furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds. IB-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 6. Power of Attorney: Attorneys-in-Fact, who sign Bid Bonds, and Performance and Payment Bonds, must file with such bonds a certified copy of their power of attorney to sign such bonds. 7. Contract Documents: The Contract Documents give the location and description of the work to be done under this Contract, the time in which the work must be completed, the amount of Bid Guarantee, the amount of the Payment and Performance Bond, time and place of receipt and opening of Bids. 8. Responsibility of Bidder to Inform Himself as to All Conditions Relating to Project: The Bidder, by and through the submission of his Bid, agrees that he shall be held responsible for having theretofore examined the site of the proposed work and completely familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the work to be performed and the equipment, materials and labor required. The Bidder also agrees that he has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents thoroughly to inform himself regarding any and all conditions and requirements that may in any manner effect the work. Failure to be so informed will not relieve a successful Bidder of his obligation to furnish all material, equipment and labor necessary to carry out the provision of the Contract Documents and to complete the contemplated work for the consideration set forth in his Bid. 9. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Each Bidder shall thoroughly examine the Construction Documents, the Proposal Form, the Agreement (Contract) Form, and all other papers comprising the Contract Documents. He shall also examine and judge for himself all matters relating to the location and the character of the proposed work. If the Bidder should be of the opinion that the meaning of any part of the drawings or the specifications is doubtful or obscure, or that they contain errors or reflect omissions, he should report such opinion or opinions to the Architect, Chalmers Yeilding, 315 E. Robinson Street, Suite 505, Orlando, Florida 32801, (407) 423-4919, at least seven (7) days before the date of the formal opening of proposals so that appropriate addenda may be issued, if necessary, to all prospective Bidders and mailed by certified mail or delivered not later than three (3) days before bids are filed with the Director of Purchasing. The Architect will not be responsible for oral interpretation given by a member of his staff, the issuance of a written addendum being the only official method whereby such an interpretation will be given. Items shown on drawings but not in the specifications are to be considered as noted in the specifications and items noted in the specifications or on drawings as to the standard of work shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to furnish a satisfactory first quality job in strict conformity with the best practice found in construction or in work of a similar type. The failure of the Bidder to direct the attention of the Architect to errors or discrepancies will not relieve the Bidder, should he be awarded the contract, of responsibility of performing the work to the satisfaction of the City of Ocoee. IB-2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 10. Basis for Bidding: The total amount bid shall be based the sum of the Base Bid plus the sum of the selected Alternates. 11. Life and Withdrawal of Bid: All Bids shall remain open for 30 days after the date of the Bid opening. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the time scheduled in the Advertisement for Bids for the opening of bids. A bid may also be withdrawn after thirty (30) days following the date of the opening of the bids, provided that the Bidder has not been notified that his bid has been accepted. 12. Qualifications and Disqualifications of Bidders: The Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder, who in the opinion of the City, is fully qualified to undertake the work. The City of Ocoee reserves the right before awarding the contract, to require the Bidder to submit such evidence of his qualifications as it may deem necessary, and may consider any evidence available to it of the financial, technical and other qualifications and abilities of a Bidder. a. The Bidder is assumed to be familiar with all Federal, State or local laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any manner affect the work, and to abide thereby if awarded the Contract. Ignorance of legal requirements on the part of the Bidder will in no way relieve him of responsibility. b. Any Bidder may be required to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Ocoee that he has the necessary personnel, facilities, abilities, and financial resources to perform the work in a satisfactory manner and within the time specified. Any of the following causes, among others, may be considered as sufficient justification to disqualify a Bidder and reject the Bid: a. Submission of more than one Bid for the same work by an individual, partnership, or corporation under the same or different name. b. If it is believed that collusion exists among Bidders, the bids of all participants of such collusion will be rejected. c. Previous participation in collusive Bidding on work for the City of Ocoee, Florida. d. Submission of an unbalanced Bid in which the prices bid for some items are out of proportion to the prices bid for other items, or if the Bid shows omissions, alterations of form, additions not called for, conditions, limitations, unauthorized alternate bids or other irregularities of any kind. e. Uncompleted work for which the Bidder is committed by Contract, which in the judgment of the City, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of the work under this Contract. f. Being in arrears on any existing Contracts with the City, or any taxes, licenses or other monies due the City; in litigation with the City having defaulted on a previous contract with the City. IB-3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 13. Bidding Errors: If after the opening of Bids, a Bidder claims an error and requests to be relieved of the Award, or the City believes that an error may have been made, the Bidder shall present his certified work sheets and supplier quotations to the City for verification. This information shall be presented on the same day as the bid opening or if the opening is in the afternoon, than by noon of the following business day. When the City suspects an error and has required the documents, failure to produce them within the time specified shall make the Bidder non-responsive and thereby disqualified. Award may then be made to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder, or the work may be re- advertised as the City Commission desires. If after review, the City is convinced that an honest, allowable (excusable mathematical) error has been made, the Bidder shall be relieved of responsibility and his Bid Guarantee shall be returned. If the City is not convinced that an honest, allowable error has been made, the Bid Guarantee shall be held by the City for damages incurred. Should the actual damages be less than the Bid Guarantee, any excess amount will be returned to the Bidder. If actual damages are greater than the Bid Guarantee, the City shall have the right to proceed against the defaulting Bidder for the additional damages. Award may then be made as stated above. 14. Award of Contract: The City Commission reserves the right to reject any or all bids or any part of any bid, to waive any informality in any bid, or to re-advertise for all or any part of the work contemplated. If a bid is found to be acceptable by the City Commission, written notice will be given to the lowest qualified responsive, responsible Bidder. 15. Return of Bid Guarantees: As soon as the bid prices have been compared, the City of Ocoee may, at its discretion, return or release the guarantee deposits accompanying such bids, as in its judgment, would not likely be considered in making the award. All other bid guarantees will be held until the contract and bond have been executed, after which any sums of money representing bid security deposits will be returned to the respective Bidders whose bids they accompanied. Bid Bonds will not be returned unless requested. 16. Guaranty of Faithful Performance And Payment: Performance and Payment Bonds, written by a Surety firm satisfactory to the City of Ocoee will be required of the successful Bidder to guarantee that he will deliver a complete project under his Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and that he will pay promptly all persons supplying him with labor or materials for the work. The Performance and Payment Bonds shall be for an amount not less than the Total Bid Price listed on the Bid. The cost of these bonds shall be included as part of the bid. IB-4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS These bonds shall be substantially in the form given herein and written by a qualified Surety firm and through a reputable and responsible surety bond agency licensed to do business in the State of Florida and Orange County. The Surety must be rated as "A" or better, Class X, in the latest edition of "Best's Key Rating Guide", published by A. M. Best Company, Inc. On projects not exceeding $500,000, a bond written by an unrated surety will be accepted provided evidence is submitted to show full compliance with Florida State Statutes Section 287.0935. 17. Insurance: Evidence of insurance must comply with the provisions of the General Conditions. 18. Building Department Registration: The Awardee and all Sub-Contractors, in order to obtain any required City of Ocoee permit, must register with the City of Ocoee Building Department. Registration must be current and in effect prior to the execution of the Contract by the City of Ocoee. Registration can be obtained upon presentation of the following: a. Proof of valid insurance with the City of Ocoee named as the Certificate Holder to receive notification upon insurance expiration or cancellation. b. An Occupational License within the State of Florida. c. State of Florida Certification or Registration as Residential, Building or General Contractor. 19. Execution of Contract: The Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded will be required to execute and deliver two copies of the following to the City: a. The Contract. b. Performance and Payment Bond. c. Evidence of required insurance. d. Proof of authority to execute the Contract. e. Proof of authority to execute the Bond on behalf of the Awardee. f. Proof of valid General Contractor license in the State of Florida. The above documents must be furnished, executed and delivered before the Contract will be executed by the City. The Contract shall not be binding upon the City until it has been executed by the City and a copy of such fully executed Contract is delivered to the Contractor. 20. Failure to Execute Contract. Bid Guarantee Forfeited: Should the Bidder to whom the Contract had been awarded refuse or fail to complete the requirements of Article 18 above within ten (10) business days after Notice of Award, the additional time in days (including weekends) required to correctly complete the documents will be deducted, in equal amount, from the Contract Time, or the City may elect to revoke the Award. If the City elects to revoke the Award, the City shall be entitled to the full amount of the Bid Guarantee, not as a penalty, but in liquidation of and for damages sustained. A Notice of Intent to Award may then be provided to the next lowest qualified responsive, responsible bidder or the City may elect to reject all bids and re-advertise for bids. IB-5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 21. Time Allowed: Time is of the essence and Contractor shall complete the work within the total number of calendar days as provided for in the Bid and Contract. 22. Building Permits: The Contractor and Sub-Contractors must obtain the standard Building permits required by the City Building Department for all work covered under this Contract. The Contractor or Sub-Contractors shall also be responsible to call for inspections required in Section 103.8 of the latest edition of the Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 23. Sunshine Act: All decisions regarding award of the Contract will be made by the City at open public meetings in accordance with the requirements of Florida Statutes. Section 286.11 (the "Florida Sunshine Act"), and all interested parties are invited to attend such meetings. IB-6 BID FORM For Renovations to the Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 for the City of Ocoee, Florida Bid of (NAME) TO: Montye Beamer, Director of Purchasing City of Ocoee 150 N. Lakeshore Drive Ocoee, FL 34761 Dear Mayor and Commissioners: The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only persons interested in this Bid as principal, or principals, is or are named herein and that no person other than herein mentioned has any interest in this Bid or in the Contract to be entered into; that this Bid is made without connection with any other person, company, or parties making a bid, and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith without collusion or fraud. The Bidder further declares that he has examined the site of the work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the work is to be done; that he has examined the Drawings and Technical Specification pertaining to the work and contractual documents relative thereto, including the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, Form of Bid Bond, Form of Contract, Form of Performance and Payment Bond, the General and Supplementary General Conditions, and the Addenda furnished prior to the opening of the bids, as acknowledged below; and that he fully understands and has satisfied himself relative to the scope and nature of the work to be performed. The Bidder agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into and execute the Contract with the City of Ocoee, Florida, in the form of Contract attached, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, transportation, supervision, and labor and all means necessary to construct and complete the work covered by this Bid and to deliver the prescribed Performance and Payment Bond. The Bidder agrees that he will, within ten (10) days after being notified of the award of the Contract to him, execute the Contract and furnish the Performance and Payment Bonds as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, written by a reputable Surety Company acceptable to the City of Ocoee and authorized to do business in the State of Florida and Orange County. Said Bonds shall be furnished for not less than the base bid price offered, the premium of the Bonds to be paid by the Bidder. And the undersigned Bidder further agrees that, in case of failure on his part to execute the said Contract and furnish the Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (10) business days of the date of issuance of a Notice of Intent to Award, the check or Bid Bond accompanying his bid, and the money payable thereon, shall be paid into the funds of the City of Ocoee, Florida, otherwise the check or Bid Bond accompanying this Bid shall be returned to the undersigned Bidder. BF-1 BID FORM The Bidder agrees to begin work on the effective date established in the "Notice to Proceed" from the City and complete the work within one hundred twenty(120) calendar days after the date of this notification. The Bidder agrees to reimburse the City of Ocoee as liquidated damages, for each calendar day elapsing between the date specified for full completion and actual date of such completion, the sum of fifty dollars ($50) per calendar day. This Bidder has included in this Bid, any applicable sales tax, and all other taxes, license or permit fees or charges required of the Bidder for his performance of the work if he is successful in securing the award of a contract for such work. Accordingly, the Bidder proposes to furnish all materials, equipment, services, and labor for the construction of the project listed above in full accordance with the Contract Documents, for the following sum of money: BASE BID Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATE 1, Add Dollars ($ ) Receipt of the following Addenda is hereby acknowledged: Addendum#1 By Date Addendum#2 By Date Addendum#3 By Date Addendum#4 By Date Attached is a certified or cashier's check on the Bank of or a Bid Bond on the standard form of the City of Ocoee for the sum of Dollars ($ ), according to the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders. BF-2 BID FORM In Witness thereof, the Bidder has hereunto set his signature and affixed his seal this day of A.D. 1994. WHEN THE BIDDER IS AN INDIVIDUAL OR SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP: (Printed Name of Individual or Sole Proprietor) (Firm Name if different from Individual or Sole Proprietor Name) (Seal) (Signature of Individual or Sole Proprietor) Bidder's Mailing Address: Phone Number: Certification Number: WHEN THE BIDDER IS A PARTNERSHIP: (Name of Firm) A Partnership By: (Seal) (Partner) Bidder's Mailing Address: Phone Number: Certification Number: Name and Address of all Partners: BF-3 BID FORM WHEN THE BIDDER IS A CORPORATION: (Name of Corporation) By: (Seal) (Official Title) Bidder's Mailing Address: Phone Number: Certification Number: Organized under the laws of the State of , and authorized by the law to make this bid and perform all Work and furnish materials and equipment required under the Contract Documents. CERTIFIED COPY OF RESOLUTION OF BOARD OF DIRECTORS (Name of Corporation) RESOLVED That of (Person Authorized to Sign) (Name of Corporation) be authorized to sign and submit the Bid of this corporation for the Project referenced above. The foregoing is a true and correct copy of the resolution adopted by (Name of Corporation) at a meeting of its Board of Directors held on the day of , 19 . BY: Title: The above Resolution MUST BE COMPLETED if the Bidder is a corporation. BF-4 BID FORM INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement may cause rejection. Additional sheets shall be attached as required. 1. Contractor's Name and Address: 2. Contractor's Telephone Number: 3. Contractor's Ucense Number: Primary Classification: Orange County Ucense Number: Ocoee Certificate of Competency Number(If obtained): 4. Number of years involved in construction work of the type involved in this Contract: 5. List of Names and Titles of all officers of Contractor's Firm. 6. Name of person who inspected the site for your firm. Name: Date of Inspection: Note: If requested by the City, the Bidder shall furnish a notarized financial statement, references and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of the Bidder's current financial condition. BF-5 BID BOND STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ) CITY OF ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned, as Principal, and a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of , having its home office in the City of and currently licensed to do business in the State of Florida, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Ocoee, Orange County, Florida, hereinafter called the City, in the penal sum of (5 percent of the Base Bid) (written amount in dollars and cents) ($ ), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted the attached Bid, dated , 1994 for the Project entitled: Renovations to the Withers-Maguire House—Phase 3. NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said Bid prior to the date of opening of the same, and shall within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written Contract with the City in accordance with the Bid as accepted, and give a Performance Bond and Payment Bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties as may be required by the Contract Documents, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such Contract and for the prompt payment of all persons furnishing labor or materials in connection therewith, or in the event of failure to enter into such Contract and give such Bond within the period specified, if the Principal shall pay to the City the difference, not to exceed the penalty hereof, between the amount specified in said Bid and the amount for which the City may produce or procure the required work and/or supplies, provided the latter amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligations shall be void and of no effect; otherwise, to remain in full force and virtue. Any changes or modifications made in or under the Bid Documents prior to submission thereof, and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the Bid or with any such changes or modifications, do not affect Surety's obligation under this Bond, notice of such changes or modifications to the Surety being hereby waived. BB-1 of 3 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bound parties have executed this instrument under their several seals on the date indicated below, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by the undersigned representatives, each pursuant to authority of its governing body. Signed, sealed, and delivered in the presence of: (DATE) ATTEST: (SEAL) PRINCIPAL BY ATTEST: (SEAL) SURETY BY Attorney-in-Fact (Note: If both Principal and Surety are corporations, their respective corporate seals should be affixed hereon, and copy of Surety representative's Power-of-Attorney attached hereto.) BB-2 of 3 CERTIFICATES AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, , certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in the foregoing Bond; that , who signed the said Bond on behalf of the Principal was then of said corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body. (SEAL) Secretary STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ) SS CITY OF ) Before me, a Notary Public duly commissioned, qualified, and acting personally appeared to me well known, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath says that he is the Attorney-in-Fact for Surety, and that he has been authorized by said Surety corporation to execute the foregoing Bond on behalf of the Contractor named herein in favor of the City of Ocoee, Florida. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 1994. Notary Public State of Florida at Large My commission Expires: (SEAL) BB-3 of 3 CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 199_, by and between the CITY OF OCOEE, Florida, a municipal corporation of the State of Florida, party of the first part (hereinafter sometimes called the "CITY"), and , Party of the second part, (hereinafter sometimes called the "CONTRACTOR"). WITNESSETH: The parties hereto, for the considerations hereinafter set forth, mutually agree as follows: Article 1. Scope of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and deliver all labor, materials, and equipment and perform all the work in a satisfactory and workman like manner, required to complete the project entitled RENOVATIONS TO THE WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE—PHASE 3 in strict and entire conformity with the Plans, Technical Specifications and other Contract Documents, which are duly approved by the CITY and which said Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents are hereby made part of this Agreement as fully and with the same effects as if the same had been set forth at length in the body of this Agreement. Article 2. The Contract Sum: The CITY shall pay to the CONTRACTOR for the said work, when fully completed, and subject to the additions and deductions provided in the Contract Documents, the total Bid Price of Dollars($ ). Article 3. Partial and Final Payments: In accordance with the provisions set forth in the "General Conditions", and subject to additions and deductions as provided, the CITY shall pay the CONTRACTOR as follows: a. On the 8th day, or the first business day thereafter, of each calendar month, the CITY shall make partial payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of a certified approved estimate of work performed during the preceding calendar month by the CONTRACTOR (submitted by the 1st of the month), less ten percent (10%) of the amount of such estimate which is to be retained by the CITY until all work has been performed strictly in accordance with the Agreement and until such work has been accepted by the CITY. b. Final payment on account of this Agreement shall be made within thirty (30) days after completion by the CONTRACTOR of all work covered by this Agreement and acceptance of such work by the CITY, if the CONTRACTOR has submitted evidence satisfactory to the CITY that all payrolls, material bills and other costs incurred by C-1 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract the CONTRACTOR in connection with the construction of the Work have been paid in full, and also, after all guarantees that may have be required in the Specifications have been furnished and found to be acceptable by the CITY. Article 4. Time of Completion: The Contractor shall commence work to be performed under this Contract within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after date of written Notice to Proceed and shall fully complete the Contract in One Hundred and Twenty (120) calendar days after said date of written notice, as may be modified in the Notice to Proceed. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence and in the event that construction of the Work is not completed within the Contract Time, as may have been modified in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of this Contract, that from the compensation otherwise to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, the CITY is authorized and shall retain, for each day thereafter, Sundays and holidays included, the sum of Fifty Dollars ($50) as liquidated damages sustained by the CITY in the event of such default by the CONTRACTOR, or shall withhold such compensation for actual and consequential damages as may be stated therein or contemplated therefrom. Article 5. The CONTRACTOR agrees to make payment of all proper charges for labor and materials required in the aforementioned work, and to defend, indemnify and save harmless the CITY and all its officers, agents, and servants, and each and every one of them against and from all suits and costs of every kind and description, and from all damages to which the said CITY or any of their officers, agents or servants may be put, by reason of injury or death to the persons or injury to property of others resulting from the performance of said work, or through the negligence of the CONTRACTOR, or through improper or defective machinery, implements or appliances used by the CONTRACTOR in the aforesaid work, or through any act or omission on the part of the CONTRACTOR, or his agent or agents, employees or servants. Article 6. It is also mutually agreed and understood that the acceptance of the final payment by the CONTRACTOR shall be considered as a release in full of all claims against the CITY or any of its members or agents, arising out of, or by reason of, work done and materials furnished under this Contract. Article 7. Additional Bond: It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto, that if, at any time after the execution of this Agreement and the Performance and Payment Bonds hereto attached for its faithful performance, the CITY shall deem the surety or sureties upon such bond to be unsatisfactory, or, if for any reason, such bond ceases to be adequate to cover the performance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, within five (5) days after receipt of notice from the City to do so, furnish C-2 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the CITY. In such event, no further payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to be due under this Agreement until such new or additional security for the faithful performance of the work shall be furnished in a manner and form satisfactory to the CITY. Article 8. Contract Documents: All of the documents listed below form the Contract and they are as fully a part of the Contract as hereto attached, or repeated in this Agreement. 1. Bid Advertisement 7. Payment Bond 2. Instructions to Bidders 8. General Conditions 3. Bid Form 9. Supplementary General Conditions 4. Bid Bond 10. Technical Specifications 5. Contract 11. Drawings 6. Performance Bond 12. Addenda The Contract is to be binding upon the CITY, its successor,or successors and upon the CONTRACTOR (and his heirs, administrator, administrators, or assignees and its successor, successors, and assigns), and is voidable and may be terminated by the CITY, in accordance with the provisions of the Specifications relative thereto are not complied with. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the date first above written in five (5) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for the other counterparts, be deemed an original contract. CITY OF OCOEE, FLORIDA Party of the First Part BY: (Seal) Mayor ATTEST: BY: City Clerk Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: Witnesses: CONTRACTOR By: (Seal) As to the Party of the Second Part C-3 Withers-Maguire House-Phase 3 Contract Approved as to Form: Approved as to Finance: BY: BY: City Attorney Director of Finance CERTIFICATE STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ORANGE ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Board of Directors of , a corporation under the laws of the State of . was held on . 199_, and the following: "Resolved,that as President of the corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Contract dated , 199_, between the CITY OF OCOEE, a municipal corporation, and the corporation, and that his execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of the corporation and with the corporate seal affixed, shall be the official act and deed of this corporation." I further certify that said resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the official seal of the corporation, this, day of , 199_. Secretary C-4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ) CITY OF ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that, as Principal, and a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of , having its home office in the City of , and currently licensed to do business in the State of Florida, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Ocoee, Florida, hereinafter called the City, in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal on the , day of , 1992, entered into a certain contract with the City for construction of: Renovations to the Withers-Maguire House—Phase 3, the said Contract being made a part of this Bond by reference; NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal: 1. Well and truly performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of said Contract and any and all duly authorized changes or modifications in or under the Contract Documents that may hereinafter be made; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials or supplies used directly or indirectly by the Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract; and 3. Indemnifies and saves harmless the City of Ocoee against and from expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care of skill, negligence or default including patent infringement on the part of said Principal, his agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said Contract, including errors in the Drawings furnished by said Principal; and 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the Contract for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of completion of the Contract or for such other period or periods of time as are specified in the Contract Documents, then this Bond is null and void; otherwise it remains in full force and effect. PPB-1 of 3 Any changes or modifications in or under the Contract Documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the Contract or with any changes or modifications do not effect Surety's obligation under this Bond, notice of such changes or modifications to the Surety being waived. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bound parties have executed this instrument under their several seals on the date indicated below, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by the undersigned representatives, each pursuant to authority of its governing body. Signed, sealed, and delivered in the presence of: (DATE) ATTEST: (SEAL) PRINCIPAL BY ATTEST: (SEAL) SURETY BY Attorney-in-Fact (Note: If both Principal and Surety are corporations, their respective corporate seals should be affixed hereon, and copy of Surety representative's Power-of-Attorney attached hereto.) PPB-2 of 3 CERTIFICATES AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, , certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in the foregoing Bond; that , who signed the said Bond on behalf of the Principal was then of said corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body. (SEAL) Secretary STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ) SS CITY OF ) Before me, a Notary Public duly commissioned, qualified, and acting personally appeared to me well known, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath says that he is the Attorney-in-Fact for , Surety, and that he has been authorized by said Surety corporation to execute the foregoing Bond on behalf of the Contractor named herein in favor of the City of Ocoee, Florida. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 199_. Notary Public State of Florida at Large My commission Expires: (SEAL) PPB-3 of 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS The "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION," AIA Document A201, (Fourteenth Edition, April, 1987), relates to the Work of this Project and is hereby made a part of this Contract as though fully contained in these Specifications. The Contractor is hereby directed, as a condition of the Contract, to obtain the necessary copies of AIA Document A201, to become acquainted with the Articles contained therein and to notify and appraise all Subcontractors, suppliers and any other parties to the Contract or individuals or agencies engaged on the Work as to its contents. No contractual adjustments shall be due or become exigent as a result of failure on the part of the Contractors to fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the contract with the conditions of AIA Document A201. A complete copy of AIA Document A201 is available for review at the office of the Director of Administrative Services, City of Ocoee. GC-1 WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 1 n ffi ® .A.....L. n y.....L. ---)i__... `_,. O C oil 6-6) 41. KITCHEN © 1 i ,9 A t lnl �„ _//// RAMP ® I OD I ,.______:)1 r97 ibil 8PANTRY r @ i - REAR PORCH o HC REST ROOM vonc„ CLOSET OO ® �] C n r n � r II 2, 1, -ri STUDY BEDROOM1 j ,9 villi/ W Oj H o la �Io m V -' HALL _ II STUDY /%//// �� 0 0 0 1 CLOSET 1 4 , . .. ,3 A ® O PARLOR 100 ° O O FRONT PORCH E u a a p NORTH FIRST FLOOR PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 2 ® Mj O n® 4 BEDROOM5 O O u 8 © I® -.., 0 © 51® ® ® 0 0 8 ® I I BEDROOM4 REAR PORCH 0 L /--t_7 REST ® ® / U ROOM ® e 1/ V Q0 61 r c t, Ic- 7 ry$ I-- O O W U bl BEDROOM 3 iia/ ® ncj HALL CLOSET BEDROOM 6 --- := -, - J ° BEDROOM 2 //,._ EBEDROO 111OM 3 ©5 © O 1 �� CLOSET7) HALL 11m BEDROOM 2 (7) LJ ® ® 0 FRONT PORCH - NORTH II SECOND FLOOR PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 3 - - - T- - - � -� - - - - - ,„ I i i I - > NORTH ATTIC FLOOR PLAN X s Ozw X x x x < 0 0 _S 0 OJ LLiLL * • SS r I I I LL • Q. � ill ill 0 WW ¢ W 0 0 W LL 3 O O O wQ C3cI-00 m 71411 .11:1111111IIII11111111cc a J i €111 -91:4111111111111111111111111 ` W U Jt a CC W CC CC = U. U. V LL, a m J J US < 0000 00 � O t71 J J J J J J J O J J J 1111111111 Z LL -I J � -3 d . 8 3 OOOOC7 00 OHO JJJJO ' J JOJ 0 11 J _.._......._-!- ,_i _ 3 OOo1a180a 11111g ; 11111111111 JJ _i _J QJJJ J ...-.. - U IIIIIrgcliiiiiiiii U3 0 "c3 4 Oo z _- I LL 1 LL 0 U N 00001100xI1IIi . . 11I ¢ ¢CC LLLL LLLLLLLL LLLL0 m m mmmmO030mmm OmC0QaaaQWQa0QQaa0 0 Q Q LL F- W I o ¢ ¢ J 0 a cc F- 2 U O S N 0 000Qcc0E- xV F 0 1- LL NP) < nU20NNgNZ U- o 0 zo9aaCa f" 8880O8O WUmz o8Ua ¢ V � 0 N 0 J ¢ > > z U O T ¢ Q Q U O J J J G N 0 0 0 Q Q N O 4' U. d = 0011Y mm ¢ ¢If4 LL Cd SSS0301 03mm03 ¢ ¢ ¢ mm WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 5 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES A. Repair all damaged or missing wood flooring to match existing. B. Sand,fill as required and refinish existing wood flooring with 3 coats of clear gloss polyurethane. C. Remove all existing flooring. Reinstall new 3/4"plywood subfloor on 2x4 ledgers nailed to sides of joists. D. Install new ceramic tile. E. Remove existing flooring down to wood strip flooring. Prepare floor for vinyl tile installation. F. Strip of all paint, sand and refinish existing with paint. G. Strip of all paint,sand and refinish existing with clear gloss polyurethane. H. Install new ceramic tile base and wainscot. L Remove plaster at top of wall to allow installation of blown-in insulation. J. Remove all existing interior material to expose framing. K. Install new vinyl tile flooring. L. Repair plaster as required. M. Install new gypsum lath and plaster. N. Remove and salvage beadboard. Reinstall beadboard. 0. Remove plaster and lath. Install beadboard salvaged from south wall. P. Paint to match existing color. Q. Paint with color 1/B1191 Pink. R. Paint with color 1137 Pink Beige. S. Paint with color 541 Green. T. Paint with color 617 Green. U. Paint with color 2/C 218 Cream. V. Paint with color 5/F 602 Green. W. Paint with color 1458 Gray. X Paint with color 764 Blue. Y. Strip, sand and finish existing newel posts and handrail with clear gloss polyurethane. Z Strip, sand and finish balusters with paint color 1/61137 Pink Beige. AA. Paint with color White. BB. Paint with color Black. CC. Sand and refinish existing wood cabinets with paint color White. DD. Clean and repair existing hearth as required. EE. Remove existing hearth to subfloor and install new hearth. FF. Restore firebox and flue to working condition. Install new damper. GG. Clean and repair chimney to working condition. HH. Install new brick face. IL Remove wood mantel and deliver to owner. Replicate mantel in Parlor, install and finish with paint clear gloss polyurethane. JJ. Remove sand finish from plaster. KK Remove popcorn finish from plaster. LL Paint interior back of kitchen cabinet 5/F 602 Green. MM Prepare walls for the installation of wall covering. Wall covering not part of Contract. NN Install new horizontal siding to match existing on wall below stair. 00 Install new horizontal beadboard siding. PP Install new wood base to match existing. WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 6 NOTES 1. Handicapped Ramp to have a maximum slope of 1 in 12. Exact lengths of ramp and locations of landings will be determined by existing floor and grade elevations. 2. Landing at door to be level with Porch floor. Submit shop drawings to Architect for approval. 3. All wood to be pressure treated. All fasteners to be hot dipped galvanized. 4. Mount continous steel handrail with top of rail 34"above ramp and landing decking. Attach to 4x4 posts. 5x7x4°Concrete Slab with 14s @ 12"oc. 1 12"OD Steel Pipe Rail iD continous with rounded ends. LANDING xl a14 Rail Cap to match existing iv F5) Porch Rail. I I 2x2 Pickets with spacing 36" 60" to match existing. 2x4 Spaced Decking. I ! �I I� ElFe— 2x4 Bottom Rail. N I�I 1\ 2x8 Skirt continous. I I Varies �n ' ' 1� 4x4 Post. i RAMP Grade 4" - 2x6 Joist. I I xl I2 18" +-- 18"dia.Concrete Footing. I I RAMP SECTION Double 2x6 Joist. SCALE 1/2" = 1'-0" I I 4x4 Post below Rail,Typical. c Continous Rail to match existing rail,Typical. - I 2_< i I� 5' 18'+F 5' r I LANDING LANDING RAMP Continous 1 12"Steel Handrail,Typical. RAMP PLAN ,r► SCALE 1/4" = 1'-0" NORTH WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 7 M o O Th • CanrG to existing SS on eke. 20 3'SS SEE PAGE Corrrect to existing 0 FOR ENLARGED PLAN 1'CW from site e to rise wet SS on site. I lt L I rt :T ► e L ._ ._ ._ ._ . ._ ._ . ._ . ._ ._ ._ ._ ._ _ n j c O�OJ 1 i SE ©E PAGE FOR ENLARGED❑ C fl PLAN �-1 L jr nJ n j C C. J__. =1"---\=1_,,f 4 . L., ! ..I3 C [ 7-0 O CIA P I I I . ii 1_ a C D -C o a aE Q a , NORTH FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 8 NOTES 1. 12"CW under floor. Provide 1/2"rise in wall to Toilet. 2. 12"CW under floor. Provide 12"rise in wall to Lavatory. 3. 4"SS to 4"SS up and down. 4. 112"SSto3"SS up and down. 5. 12"HW down from Attic to Lavatory supply. 6. 3/4"CW under floor to Kitchen. 7. 1"CW from site. Rise below floor to inside wall. Rise 3/4"to 2nd floor and Attic. CO 4" SS up and down. Note 5 Note 3 Note 7 CO --\F • �._ ._ .- .- .- ._ .- .- .1 . --� C �– Note 2 Note L .— .— .-_ ._ .— ._ .1 `1 ON0t519C O 4 • I FIRST FLOOR RESTROOM PLAN SCALE 1/2" = 11-0" WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 9 NOTES 1. 1 12"Double Compartment Sink P-Trap assembly with Dishwasher connection. 2. 3/4"HW down in wall from EWH in Attic. Provide 1 t2"connection to Dishwasher and 12"connection in wall to Sink. 3. 3/4"CW under floor. Provide 12"rise in wall to Sink connection. 0 0 Note 2 O 0 2"VUP 2"SS • to existing SS on site. 2"SSDN/ 2"VUP 0 Note 1 Il ' 0 cam., ` Note 3 KITCHEN PLUMBING PLAN SCALE 1/2" = 1'-0" WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 10 NOTES 1. 3/4"HW in wall to 1st floor. 2. 2"vent up to VTR. M WW1 .. . a4NMI 2 Jr" 11 IL SEE PAGE FOR ENLARGED C� PLAN 0.1 . ra ® 11 II ..) :1 `.- 1)3 A u I— .-.--,, 7yr-) / n u rc) u riI r —----r----1-,—--m——•-•——r- A. a - u . ... - U NORTH SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 11 NOTES 1. 12"CW in 1st floor ceiling,up thru wall to Lavatory CW supply. 2. 12"HW down thru wall from Attic to Lavatory HW supply. 3. 112"SSto3"SS down. 4. 4"SS to 4"SS down. 5. 112"V to 3"VTR. 6. 3/4"CW up to Attic mounted EWH. 7. 12"HW down to 1st floor Lavatory. 4" SS DN. 3" V UP. Note 5 Note 3 -Note 2 Note 7 Note 6 41 ' Note 1 - • Note 4 6 r--------7 0 SECOND FLOOR RESTROOM PLUMBING PLAN SCALE 1/2" = 1'-0" WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 12 NOTES 1. 314"CW rise in wall to to Attic mounted EWH. 2. 3/4"HW thru Attic to drops in wall. 3. 3/4"HW thru Attic to drops in wall to 1st floor. 4. 1"drop In wall from emergency pan to discharge at visible area on grade. EWH 4- _C40 gallon, 240V/1 phase 3" VTR 6000/6000 Watts I I non-simultaneous. I — Note 4 Note 2 LT . . L : T .TO Note 1 3" VTR TR � I / NORTH ATTIC PLUMBING PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 13 CONNECTION ON DRAIN PAN CLEAN OUT CAP OR PLUG ----\\ (REMOVEABLE) AIR HANDLING UNIT f-1 I I I NX" /, / "XN CONDENSATE /� DRAIN, "CD" -- AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN FULL SIZE OF AHU. ROUTE TO DRYWELL I PROVIDE FLOAT SWITCH OR AS INDICATED IN PAN TO SHUT DOWN AHU. CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL NO SCALE "X"=TRAP SEAL, 2"MINIMUM OR 1/2"PLUS STATIC PRESSURE OF UNIT,WHICHEVER IS GREATER. "CD"=CONDENSATE DRAIN , MINIMUM 3/4"OR AS INDICATED. WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 14 FINISHED GRADE MANHOLE SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY "NEENAH"FOUNDRY CO. MODEL R-4044-K TO FIT OVER RCP BELL. 1 W7////////////////////////( ' IIIIII-IIIIII- 1 111111-111111- IIIIII-IIIIII \ -111111-III 1 IIIIII-IIIIII- IIIIII-IIIIII- OliI 4 36" CLEAR WATER WASTE • •00,4$,I UNION SEE PLANS FOR SIZE `•,•.•�•,: •o• RUN IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC. 12" �••od -•., , RCP 45 ° • Or 0- sae:0)W041.04.0.4••. .00 •V-4••••�j•-•• CRUSHEDVESTONE r'-' "1 DRYWELL DETAIL NOT TO SCALE M-0014 WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 15 PGS //A % 0p'Q''``0. �OAp�p' / 1� GJV t. p•I -coLiricild co'S 1 p0 e'p �2 O�\�eP WATER HEATER DETAIL NTS W0016 WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 16 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE • Renovate existing sink and fittings. Provide and install new cast brass P-trap and hot and cold water supplies with stops. Provide dishwasher tail piece in new sink P-trap. Q Furnish and install new dishwasher. ® Renovate existing lavatory and fittings. O Renovate existing water closet and fittings. Furnish and install new handcapped accessible water closet . Q Furnish and install new handcapped accessible lavatory. To Existing 3"VTR JIL J L I 3"V I 1 112"V 1 12" ¢1 3"V 2"2 SSSECONDSECOND I`2"V I SS LAV FLOOR III RESTROOM 1 wc O 4" ss cw 2O 4" 1_ — — -2"V SS 1 d1 1/4"V I CO 112" SINK 1O 112" FIRST 2 ss . 1 ss 3" wc FLOOR I ss 4" 4" ® 0 RESTROOM SS I CO 'Co PLUMBING KITCHEN RESTROOMS RISER DIAGRAMS WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 17 NOTES 1. All refrigerant piping to be run below grade in PVC sleeve. Size PVC pipe to accomodate refrigerant pipe and insulation. Weather seal ends of PVC piping. 2. Remove existing 36x23 floor grill. Remove and refurbish existing 30x23 floor grill. Connect new 30x23 plenum to existing grill and return as indicated. Paint inside of plenum flat black. 10x8 Outside At Duct WM Motorized Outside Al Damper. 10x6 Ttiue Model 8F Pedoreted Precast Steel Gil betind Lattice. 340 1 CO � . DRY WELL NSATE p 81 dr z ._:- ...._. , k ^' I 4- 1360M AHU-3 I I I + t HP-3 HP-1 HP-2 HP-4 28x14 I o n sA-2 t 7- n–, I 125 II u�360CFM iG j 6x6 This Model BF Pedaled « Steel On beNnd Lattice. ¢---10x10� � a n (� L,_ 10X6+ 6x6 OUeld.At Dud wth p 0 I 14x6 Duct from Fan to Wal I Mdarized Outside Al Danger. © Cap PW WY Cap to n:/ match I ^I tivp n IEF-2 in Ceing.mount Speed I rt-10x10 i I I CF .1 t toCFo 9M Exhaua� e IAHU-4.1 s SA-2 ' 1175 CFM I..iIII�4000FM I 114X12 LJ+-.CC aa I r• n n SA•2 "� �"- ??y 3 10x6 o U�40001`2FM I L TOAHU-4 RAG I RAG it-1°x10K N1 Note 2 • '� 14x12+ — — n I 1 1 I Y----10x10 I ' .rI Under Cut Door. 40SA-2 0 CFM + 7M Steer 1 — SA-2 I Cr 6x6 1 8x10 275 CFM li U'-t r...._ _ 10X8 — — 10X8{C = .tea....... ._C '�—_ /�//f/ SA-2 I TO 275 CFM Y�400 CFM I TO AHU-3 Slater I .J c 11 T--10.10,4x12_ H _ 'WO_ _, — — - Q u u 9x12 t—u ' 40 b 1 t. 0 CFM 1 $-10x10 ril SA-2 u-8 9x12 400 CFM n S r• O • ill 0 7 NORTH FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 18 NOTES 1. Second Floor Plan is for location of Diffusers and Grills. See Attic Mechanical Plan for duct layout,sizes etc. M n, 1u -'un TO AHU-2 -cja n-4 1u (---; d �� e "1--" L.-- " 1C II , u J I_AG J - 11 •- _)3:Fr.) .___0i U-4 CD CM CD 0 n L.1-°..// TO AH U-1 L'u n U I r- n� u - IL. it .: a a 0 - NORTH SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 19 NOTES 1. Install horizontal AHU complete with full size emergency drain pan with float switch for unit shut down. I 1 1 n-► 6 12 1 612CFM n o RAG-1� 2 168 a 10x4 Dud from Fan to Wal Cap.Pail Wal Cap to match Sdrg. 18x12 AHU-2 �C 18x 12 gots, I MI -1 I 1 in rbn Mout Speed Coixhaus 1 on Fan and balance to 100 CFM exhaust. SA-1 I t---1 8x6 1 U-I, 622M 10x12 RA Duct lI AHU-1 ' t4 R'""6x6 zedd OOsideutsiddeAiA ct Damper. 10x8 Outside At Duct with A.1 110x4 RAG-1 n ate 1 _ I Motorized Outside Al Damper. 100 CFM rT10rWWand�or rd�o— I I / _- T. — exkdig kxrvw h ��1. i �11r�LLL,tI - -� n-0 16X8 3Qt- c t24 U 360 CFM Snake Detector — 1�G J \ Y /'' 1 il < / 2x12 \ SA-1 SA-1 SA•1 10x4 16x8 16x8 -0 Ma 360 CFM 100 CFM 350 CFMf 350 CFM CD I. CD 20x12 20x12 , \12x12 t l 1 o r-► SA-1 ti 360 CFM I - 1 _ n I 16x12 500 CFM U U_,360CFM r -1- i NORTH ATTIC MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 20 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP SCHEDULE REFERENCE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15781 ;HEATING AND COOUNG TAG HP-1 HP-2 HP-3 HP-4 EER(A.R.I.),(MINIMUM) CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM COP(A.R.I)(MINIMUM) CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM CODE MINIMUM FAN SECTION AHU-1 AHU-2 AHU-3 AHU-4 CAPACITY(CFM) 2700 1125 2700 800 OUTSIDE AIR(CFM) 340 90 300 100 MOTOR(HP) 1.5 1/3 2 1/4 EXTERNAL S.P.(IN W.C.) 1.2 XX 1.5 XX ELECTRICAL DATA,V/PH/60HZ 230/3 230/1 230/3 230/1 COOUNG SECTION CAPACITY(MBTUMR) SENSIBLE 62.3 22.8 62.3 17.2 TOTAL 90.0 30.8 90.0 24.2 ENT.AIR TEMP 80/66 80/66 80/66 80/66 HEATING SECTION SYSTEM HEATING CAPACITY(MBH) 85.0 29.8 85.0 23.6 AUXILIARY ELECTRIC HEAT CAPACITY KW 14.96 KW 5.76 KW 14.96 KW 5.76 KW ELECTRICAL DATA V/PH/60HZ 230/3 230/1 230/3 230/1 CONTROL STAGES 1 1 1 1 FILTER SECTION TYPE TA TA TA TA VELOCITY(MAX.)FPM 500 500 500 500 THICKNESS(IN.) 2" 2" 2" 2" CONDENSING UNIT HP-1 HP-2 HP-3 HP-4 NO.OF COMPRESSORS 1 1 1 1 RUNNING FLA 28.4 13.3 28.4 10.5 NO.OF CONDENSER FANS 1 1 1 1 RUNNING FLA 3.2 0.9 3.2 0.9 ELECTRICAL DATA V/PH/60HZ 230/3 230/1 230/3 230/1 BASIS OF DESIGN AIR HANDLING UNIT MFGR. TRANE TRANE TRANE TRANE MODEL TWE 090A TWH036B14 TWE 090A TWH024B14 CONDENSING UNIT MFGR. TRANE TRANE TRANE TRANE MODEL TWA 090A TWR730A100A TWA 090A TWR724A100A NOTES: 1. WIRE ALL FAN MOTORS TO RUN CONTINUOUSLY. WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 21 POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATOR SCHEDULE UNIT NUMBER EF-1 EF-2 MANUFACTURER LOREN COOK LOREN COOK MODEL NUMBER UTILE GEM-II GEMINI DRIVE DIRECT DIRECT SERVICE TOILET EXHAUST TOILET EXHAUST INTERLOCKS AHU-2 AHU-4 PERFORMANCE DATA AIR FLOW CFM 100 190 EXTERNAL AIR STATIC PRESSURE INCHES/H2O .25 .25 MAXIMUM SOUND RATING 4.2 SONES 1.6 SONES ELECTRICAL DATA WATTS 60 WATTS 81 WATTS VOLTAGE/PH/60HZ 120V/1 120V/1 NOTES: 1,2 1,2 NOTES: 1.PROVIDE GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPER, BIRD SCREEN,SOUD STATE SPEED CONTROLLER,DISCONNECTING MEANS,WALL CAP,THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. 2. WIRE FANS TO RUN CONTINUOUSLY WITH AHU FANS. AIR DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE PLAN MANUFACTURER MARK DESCRIPTION MATERIAL FINISH NOTES &MODEL No. CURVED BLADE SUPPLY DIFFUSER MATCH TITUS SA-1 ONE WAY THROW WITH PLASTER ALUMINUM CEILING 1,2,3,4 MOUNTING FRAME. COLOR SERIES 250-AA-L1 FLOOR MOUNTED REGISTER MATCH SA-2 STEEL FLOOR HART&COOLEY 1.2.3,4 COLOR #210 FLOOR REGISTER CURVED BLADE RETURN GRILLE ALUMINUM MATCH TITUS 3,4 RAG-1 WITH PLASTER MOUNTING FRAME. CEILING COLOR 23 RL FACE SIZE INDICATED ON PLAN. 30°DEFLECTION NOTES: 1. CFM INDIACTED ON PLAN. 4. OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER 2. ADJUSTABLE PATTERN 3. NECK SIZE INDICATED ON PLAN. WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 22 • Underground Service Nate 1 to Meter on Pole Nd•16 346,1I/10 GRN,1 1/4" 2410.11110 GRN,314" LA 2/6,1110 GRN 602 - BSc AC C 550 55/3 30/2 25/2 0 , LA Note 3 Shunt Trip Butt. 31 33 _ ER 8 o „ „ og- �. ■_u 2110,1110 GRN,1 IT GFI �, '�I TO PHOTOCELL _� HP-3 0 0 Bei Al AC- u I I I 55A Note m (y C9 (9 • / I C'� •�I3/6,1/10GRN HP-3 HP-1 HP-2 HP-4 15 Na,.9 Panel AC 22 LA I O NEMA 3R WP h►\:ii INIII'Ør 16 9 AC LAEF 1 Note 12 22 II AMINITOPHOTOCELL= 302HP-4 1. ° .Bei W2►10,1110GRN Ilhk �I 111�� 111 • NIXe 9 b �_ - Nd.7Typical © ;Ole_ 14ERO LA © �%LA —11611'. Panel LA TTB,Note 19 d 3 F. IM SYNde 5n Panel. LA d ,I 18 III III = GFI LA iIIh.iI' TO LIGHTii 3 - 10 _ ABOVE Q WP LA NV tt if L400 !If J 400# • G IdN .15 r . 1 On r l C 0 TO LIGHT POST 69 STREET 1� FIRST FLOOR L 3 ELECTRICAL PLAN IC 0 0 0 0=0 0 a ER 0 0 ER ER WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 23 Nabs to al _ I Aim 0. wp : of 2 Note 13 TO PHOTO CELL 1151 TO SWRCH BELOW 1 TO UGHT IN ATTIC I f • l8 tp a a 4 I 'I.I� 8 LA fr Note 2 I Note 7 Ole . Typical 3 LB • LB I 4 LB 0011 2 • 1 %/////% . A . . eIIIID ilt ....,,,ke _U. ‘ :e,. III lI li 6 0 A. ID NORTH SECOND FLOOR U ELECTRICAL PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 24 2110,1110 GRN 10 PB _LL102 352 12 Note 10 AHU-2 TO SWITCH BELOW 218,1110 GRN Note 11 AHU-1 Note 10 55/3 318,1!10 GRN LB 21 .416- NORTH 41.NORTH ATTIC ELECTRICAL PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 25 NOTES ❑ 1. Install Lightning Protection Air Terminal at Chimney. Submit proposed details to Architect for approval. Note 1. 2. Install Lightning Protection Air Terminal on Spire. Submit proposed details to Architect for approval. 3. All Grounding Cable to be concealed. Note 3.typical. • Note 2. e Note 1 Note 1. Note 2. AL NORTH ROOF ELECTRICAL PLAN WITHERS/MAGUIRE HOUSE RENOVATION PHASE 3 PAGE 26 Panel AC(200A) See Panel Schedule SECOND FLOOR Note 14—) 200/3 Meter on Pole—.- 0 i-- Shunt Trip Panel LA(400A) Panel AC(200A) Button NEMA 3R 200/3 300/3 Main Circuit Breaker // with Shunt Trip _ 400A,3 phase, 240V Service------ 4 //// //// • Ground See Panel Schedule GRADE /// 300A Underground Service ----9 See Panel Schedule ELECTRICAL POWER RISER DIAGRAM NOTES: 01 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE A INTO THE NEW PANEL "LA" . THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL RE-WIRE AND CONNECT AS REQUIRED. 02 PHOTO CONTROL DEVICE "P-A" FOR FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR FORCH LIGHTS SHALL BE MOUNTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. THE PHOTO CELL SHALL FACE NORTH. 03 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL RECEPTACLE TO MATCH PLUG SUPPLIED WITH THE ELECTRIC RANGE. 04 THE EXISTING TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD "TTB" SHALL BE REMOVED AND TURNED OVER TO THE OWNER. THE EXISTING TELEPHONE SYSTEM SHALL BE REMOVED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND TURNED OVER TO THE OWNER. 05 THE EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM SHALL REMAIN. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A DEDICATED 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR THE SECURITY EQUIPMENT. 06 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL PRESSURE TREATED 6" X 6" POST FOR INSTALLATION OF THE PANEL "AC" AND THE WP RECEPTACLE. THE POST SHALL BE SET 4-1/2 ' BELOW WITH A HEIGHT ABOVE GROUND FOR INSTALLATION OF PANEL "AC" TO MEET NEC AND LOCAL CODE. 07 DO NOT MOUNT OUTLET BOX BACK-TO-BACK. DO NOT USE THRU THE WALL BOXES THROUGH OUT THE HOUSE. 08 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT FOR THE TELEPHONE. THE 3/4" CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED FROM THE SECOND FLOOR DOWN TO THE LOCATION LABELED X ON THE EXTERIOR OF THE BUILDING. THE TELEPHONE COMPANY WILL INSTALL THE WIRING UNDER A SEPARATE CONTRACT. 09 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCH NEMA 3R FOR THE HP-3 AND HP-4 AIR HANDLERS LOCATED BELOW THE FLOOR. SIZE AND FUSE THE DISCONNECT AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER OF THE HVAC EQUIPMENT. 10 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR THE INSIDE AHU- . SIZE AND FUSE THE DISCONNECT SWITCH AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER OF THE HVAC EQUIPMENT. 11 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER EWH WITH THE INSTALLER OF UNIT. WIRE AND CONNECT THE EWH AS REQUIRED. IF A DISCONNECT SWITCH IS NOT PROVIDED WITH THE EWH, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ONE. SIZE AND FUSE THE DISCONNECT SWITCH AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER OF THE EWH. 12 EXHAUST FAN NO 1 SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY AHU-4. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 1" CONDUIT BETWEEN EF-1 AND AHU-4. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONTROL WIRE BETWEEN THE TWO. THE SIZE AND QUANTITY SHALL BE AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER OF THE EF-1 AND HVAC EQUIPMENT. 13 EXHAUST FAN NO 2 SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY AHU-2. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 1" CONDUIT BETWEEN EF-2 AND AHU-2. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONTROL WIRE BETWEEN THE TWO. THE SIZE AND QUANTITY SHALL BE AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER OF THE EF-2 AND HVAC EQUIPMENT. 14 SEE DETAIL C FOR PANEL "LA" SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS. 15 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONDUIT WITH WIRES TO THE POST MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE APPROXIMATELY 110 FEET FROM THE HOUSE. VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THE POST LIGHT FIXTURE WITH THE ARCHITECT. 16 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL TELEPHONE TERMINAL AT LOCATION LABELED X AS DIRECTED BY THE INSTALLER QF THE TELEPHONE WIRES. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT CALCULATIONS The Short Circuit Current Calculations are based from the book "Electrical Wiring Commercial" by Ray C Mullin and Robert L Smith Fifth Edition Dated 1984. Information Provided by Field or System Conditions: KVA = Transformer KVA Rating = 75 E(L-L) = Voltage Line to Line = 240 Trans % Z = Transformer Impedance in % = 1. 6 L = Length of Secondary Conductor Run in Feet = 150 C = Constant Derived from Tables for Specific Type of , Conductor and circuit Arrangement. See Attached Table for C Values. Calculated Information: I = Full Load Rating Amps of the Transformer FLA I = Transformer Short Circuit Current SCT I = Main Switchboard Short Circuit Current SCM Short Circuit Available at Main Switchboard: I = KVA X 1,000 = 75 X 1000 = 180. 64 FLA E(L-L) X 1.73 240 X 1. 73 Multiplier M = 100 = 100 = 62.5 Trans % Z 1. 6 I = I X M = 180.64 X 62.5 = 11,290.00 SCT FLA Short Circuit Available at Main Switchboard: f = 1.73 X L X I = 1.73 X150 X 11,290.00 = 0.28 SCT 3 X C X E(L-L) 3 X 14700 X 240 I = I X 1 = 11,290. 00 X 1 = 8,820.31 SCM SCT 4 1 + f 1 + 0.28 DETAIL G NO SCALE M > H x CI) CQ A £ X Z w O O 0 1-1 E1 W a s W a N W C1 C*J 41 41 W W W Cr] W 41 W W W 7 U 1 a C4 U Ix 00000000 Z C4 u U 44 Cn x A Q U FC r.>: 44 44 44 44 44 g4 44 44 z w W W a H 3 x a w a a a a 44 a a a a a a 0 Cr) C4 a CO a w r.4 CO a CO Cl) CO CO U) CO cn co cn co cn U U >00 0CD 0 Cr) CO CD a = 0 CD 010 _ CO Q 0 0 O N U) O 0 N 6-4 Zz _ N O 0 0 O 0 a.gg _. > too o 10 N a r1 ri r) r-1 0 H C4 a 0 0 0 0 11) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d' Ug N N N N M V' N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4t 1 - r-1 H a a r U X 1 i 1 r'1 r-1 N N 1 ri r I r 1-I r1 i i ri rr-I rr-1 r-1 r1 r-1 A . U Z El N V1 vO coN VN 0 ' tO U) O V' 'O CO 0 N V' 'O CO O N 0O U 0 0 0 0 0 r1 i 1 N N N N N r-I rr-1 rC') Cr) Cr) Cr) Cr) V' V' H Q E V N 0 H a, G4 W VI I # I I # I 1 4K 1 1 * 1 1 -K I I IC I I * 1-1 V' Cl) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I V' N I ra4 Ln H N C4 oce Co I •K 1 1 -K 1 1 -K 1 I -K I 1 -k I I -K 1 1 .K I • V' I 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I r-I E4 NCA a FC Ie I I i; I I ac 1 I -K I 1 ac I I Ic 1 1 -K I 1 W W Q Z H ri Cr) U) N CT r1 Cr) U) N CT ri Cry U) N CT 7-1 Cr) to N Crr-1 A 3 H U H 0 O O O O O r-1 r1 1 1 N N N N N rr-1 rCr) Cr) Cr) Cr) W ) Cr) ' x rn -1Cr) H ElZ U A C4 zIz-1a Ha w oICC A a0 o a ri r1 ri r1 ri ri r) r1 ri r1 r1 ri r1 ri r1 ri r1 ,-I r1 Z 0 A w Elaa 0 0 0 0 0 0 to O O O O O O O O O O O O X X Z N N N N N N U) N N N N N N N N N N N N 0 CO 14Cw u> 0 M Ln a I tri r) O O O O U) C11 > U) U) 0 U) ON O = ri r1 U) ri V1 N \ N O O 0 0 0 N '-a' > 1.0 N 0 U) CT r1 ri r♦ Lc) ri ggH 44 Q. A 0 Z x 4 Cr) U) \ U A C4 Cn O0El U El C=7 a 14 W C4 W W V' a Q W W W W W W W W W W W 0 > u u I U a V V U u u V u u Z w Ix V U 4: Cn V AC A V U 44 RC 4 4 4 4 4 KC FC QC z .a W W Cx) a H W a x C*7 47 a a a a a a Cts a a a O C*] Cl) CG C4 Cl) .-1 C)4 Co 4 C4 a Cl) Cl) Cl) in 01 CO Cl) Cl) Cl) CO U H a 4COH E. 0 0 .: x CO x x \ a 0 0 U q 0 0 a s 0 0 H H a El W U] a Oa Jr a a w as cw/) w 0 0 a w w w w w w w w a > 0 0 U W UM a U U U U Z H a U U FC C/) C!) /C VFL'i) 0 0 U Z 4 Q'i 4 Q'. Q'. a'4 z W W W 04 E-' E+ a Ei W a W W 4 a s a a a a a 0 a F Cl) a s Cr) a a Cl) ,-a a CO a s 04 Co Co CO CO CO CO CO U a 0 U >CT a; r-+ _ - a3 c o 0 o O o a1 CO4 0 0 0 0 > a1 o Si) N ri T-1 r-I r-I r1 N 4 44 0 0 0 0 a• N ri r1 r-i 1-4 ri N CO E-' a s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z U X N N N N N N N N N N N 04 0 NNNNNNN a M X as Ea V x a ,--1 r t- 4 r-1 r-1 e--.1 r1 r1 r 1 r-1 r-I HCO r1 r-1 r-1 r-11 rri r1 U 0 U _ x ZZ E+ N d' tN '140 CO 0 ' k0 CO 0 N t0 CO 0 N V' t0 CO 0 N E1 0 0 H V 0 0 0 0 0 r-4 1.-4 ri H r-1 N N N N N M Cr) co Cr) Cr) V' 'V' t0 4 E U --' a�El O H 0:4W W U I I -k I I is I I is I I 3 1 I do I I is I I # HH t0 En 111111111111111111111 CT d' ELI 0 H 0 C 4 a' I 3 I I is I I 3 I I 3 I I is I I 3 I I -IC I 0 M I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I I t 3 r-C Z d' Cn a s # I I -K I I is I I -x I I do I I 4 I I is I IX W N Ey T-1 Cr) U) N 01 11 Cr) U) N al r1 Cr) U) N al r1 CO U) N CT T441W y Cl) H Z U 0 0 0 0 0 0 ,-i H v-1 r 1 N l rN N N N Cr) Cr) Cr) Cr) Cr) V' V H aZZ _ w Z W Ell Ea Z 0.4 w a 0 V coXa i rri 1-.11.-.11-1 1- r-11 1--1ri rr-1 rr-1 C") r1 r-11 r1 N ri rr0 U A w E4 a s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U X X N N N N N N N N N N N AC 0 N tN 0 N N N r. 0 CO .'>:' U> CO 0 a I ill 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > CO > OCC) inn IOn tor) N 0 Co 0 r-4 r1 r1 ri r1 U) (NI V' N \ - O O O O N 0 a1 0 R; Q 0 0 0 0 • 0 N = > U) N U) U) t0 O t0 e--C r1 ri r-I ri r-I U) N 4 E a 4 Ei w FC Q F 0 Cr) -Ic x 4 Ei) En 131 01 0 H 04O O O , 0 p t01 A x LO 64 1'4 0 E1 a U) 0 0 0 44 W 44 0 H 4 C.) E. W a s W a U W a 0 W a A a W a W W W W W U > 0 U 0 W 0 0000 Z w P 00 44 cn U 4 U U 440 0 Z 4 U 4 4 4 4 2 a w w w a E+ W a W W a ld W uC a w a a. a a 0 01 (/) a s CO a s CO 0 a CO a a 04 c,0 (4 co U) cn Cr) U ) - - - - - - 4 U x 4 x A W El I I I 3 W W W W W W W W W W W W W U > N a UM a U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U U Z a n U 4 4 4 4 *4 4 4 04 4 4 0,4 4 4 Z W a a a co a a a a a a a a a a a a a o Cl) x x x a c/) Cl) Cl) Cl) U) Cr) Ci) OD Cl) U) U) U) cn U U cg o 0 > O Ln v r-i U — 1 N C4 - >0 0 ton W4.1 N Z - 0 0. 0 10 az , > o o ton • z a V N r-I Ve Ea G. Ln 0 in 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 vo U X X t0 Cl) N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N #t I ..—, r-I Ea X x a Cr) N N .-I r1 i 1 . rr-1 r-I 1--1 '-I v-I e-1 ri r-I rI r-I a 0 1:11 U ZZ E N 6.0 CO 0 N Vt0 CO 0 N de kr, CO 0 N d' 1.033 p CO O N , H O V Z 0 0 0 0 r-i v-4 ri 1-4 r-I N N N N N Cr) Cr) Cr) Cr) CO V V' E 4 Z U - 0 O UI-I a, W W -0 I I I I .) I I -K I I i I I - I I •k I I # In M in I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I Lf) O 1 44 0 H O C4 ge x I -KI I 'K 1 I 9c 1 1 -K 1 I -ic I 1 -ic 1 I -K I • dv IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII zE-i NCn a4 � I 1 -K I I 3 1 1 9c I I -Ic I I -K I 1 i< I I x L W E 1-1 Cr) ll) N Oo N h r-1 Cr) tO1 1-1 Cr) In N 01 ei Cr) to N ON ri A N Q ZU Z 1- t-1 1-10 0 0 0 0 rr-1 r-I ri N N N N N Cr) CO Cr) M M 'de W x u) E 64 crl E-0 W Z Z 1 U CI ZHx Z A Ea a � 0Z V X a Cr) Cr) N v-i i ri ri rr-I r I v-I -i i erT-4i i ri rrZ W W U A (r, Eap, In to O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XX E In LU c`') NNNNNNNNNNNNN 004 Ln xU RC 0 0 a = > 0 0 1-1 i v to ,--1 cr) O O o to > a l > 0 0 o LO n v-I O = ,:r Lc) N ei V N __ \ - O O 0 O to =� cV > O O to ri I 'r U) N ri E A > a X 4 A U W H [-t a Cl) 0 E W Cr) Ve W W W W W W W W W W W W W W U > r-1 I I U a s 0 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 Z w a I x A *4 4 4 d 4 04 4 4 a d 4 4 QC Z a w ax x 04 a a a a a a a a a a a a o W CO x 4 4 CO CO CO U) Cr) CO CO U) CO Cl) v) CO m U WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project consists of Improvements to the Withers-Maguire House located in Ocoee, Florida, as shown in the Project Manuel prepared by Chalmers Yeilding Architect, dated September 1994. B. The Work consists of interior renovation, handicapped ramp, mechanical, electrical and security systems. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner access. 1. Confine construction access, construction employee parking and construction operations to immediate vicinity of the Withers-Maguire House. Specific locations for parking, material storage and construction trash storage to be approved by Owner. 2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. 3. Store materials in orderly fashion and keep site free from trash and debris. 4. When project completed, repair all areas disturbed or damaged by construction including lawn areas, driveways and sidewalks. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable). PART 3-EXECUTION(Not applicable). END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Schedule. B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Section "Submittals". 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a Contractor's construction schedule. b. Application for Payment form. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of alternates. e. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the "items"to be used on the Owner's Progress Payment Form. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. 2. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 3. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT: A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. B. Payment Application Times: The date for submittal of each Application for Payment is the 1st day of each month. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period ending 5 days prior to the date for each progress payment and starting the day following the end of the preceding period. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the form for Application for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. E. Transmittal: Submit 4 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours;two copies shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect. F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors or sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final waivers. 3. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Submittal Schedule. 5. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: 1. Warranties(guarantees)and maintenance agreements. 2. Maintenance instructions. 3. Final cleaning. 4. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 5. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 6. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION(Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01040- PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination. 2. General installation provisions. 3. Cleaning and protection. B. Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. C. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction is subject to deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Unprotected storage. 2. Improper shipping or handling. 3. Theft. 4. Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Product Data. 3. Samples. B. Administrative Submittals: Submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Performance and Payment bond. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of Subcontractors. C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section 01027 "Application for Payment". 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 2. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a Allow 7 calendar days for initial review. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. Allow one week for processing each resubmittal. c. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Include the following information on the label. a Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of subcontractor. d. Name and address of supplier. e. Name of manufacturer. f. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Submittal Transmittal: Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and indicate deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 the Work". 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". B. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule each month and submit the updated schedule concurrently with the Application for Payment. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Confirm compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents prior to submitting Product Data. 1.6 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. 1. Include the following: a Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. 1.7 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable). PART 3- EXECUTION(Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Water service. 2. Temporary electric power. 3. Telephone service. C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 3. Waste disposal services. 4. Project Identification Sign Revision. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design library"Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Do not overload facilities. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 equipment. C. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. D. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical or aerated recirculation type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. E. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. F. Fire Extinguishers: Provide at least one hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguisher, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1. Use Charges: Cost of installation and use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect unless so indicated, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. B. Water Service: Water is available at the site and may be used by the Contractor in quantities necessary for the construction at no cost to the Contractor. C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size and capacity to meet power requirements during construction period. Include meter, transformer, overload protected disconnects, and automatic ground-fault interrupters. 1. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power service underground. D. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. 3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access and at locations approved by the City Building Department. 1. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Provide incombustible construction for office. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. B. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project site. C. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. D. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Revise existing project identification sign to comply with layout provided by Architect. 1. Match existing lettering. F. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. All costs associated with disposal of waste and all liability resulting from disposal of waste is the responsibility of Contractor. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose. B. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. 3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification sign. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 01700- PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Submittal of warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections of the Technical Specifications included herein. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 3. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. 4. Deliver extra stock, and similar items. 5. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 6. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion. 5. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of material that requires any maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper maintenance. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities". B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. a Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains,films and similar foreign substances. d. Clean the site of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Rake grounds in any areas used during construction that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface. e. Regrade and resod lawn areas disturbed during construction to match existing lawn, and repair any driveways or sidewalks broken during construction. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. 1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 02070-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the following: 1. Wood flooring and subflooring. 2. Vinyl and ceramic tile flooring 3. Plaster and lath. 4. Miscellaneous metal, wire, plumbing piping, electrical conduit, electric wire and devices, and miscellaneous wood blocking. 5. Masonry fireplaces and hearths. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Condition of Structures: Owner or Architect assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. B. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. C. Protections: Provide barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury during demolition work. 1. Provide any shoring, bracing or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. Maintain existing temporary shoring and bracing until suchtime as it is no longer required. 2. Protect from damage existing work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 3. Protect floors with suitable coverings. 4. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 5. Remove protections at completion of work. D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused by demolition work. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with governing regulations. B. If unanticipated structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Contact Architect describing in detail the conflict. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Historic artifacts, antiques, and other articles of historic significance, remain property of Owner. Notify Owner if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal and salvage for Owner. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site all debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition, comply with applicable regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3. All liability resulting from disposal of materials from demolition operations is the responsibility of Contractor. 3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures and finishes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side. C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mgA that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Ry Ash: ASTM C 618,Type C or Type F. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 when acceptable to Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. E. Water: Drinkable. 2.4 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. B. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties: 1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; 470 lb. cement per cubic yard min; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non-air-entrained). C. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 2 inches and not more than 4 inches. 2. Other concrete: Not more than 5 inches. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F(30 deg C) and 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of anchor bolts with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for offsets, keyways, recesses, radius, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and the like, for easy removal. D. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as approved by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.4 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation and reinforcing steel. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete,"and as herein specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment or by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 3.6 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of stair treads strike off smooth and finish to match existing. 3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing and/or by moisture-retaining cover curing as herein specified. C. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported stairs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above. 3.8 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams and stairs, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75%of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. 3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. 1. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. 3.10 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect. Tests meeting specifications will be paid for by the Owner. Tests not meeting specifications and related retests will be paid for by the Contractor. B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; provide one test at point of discharge for each day's pour. Additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 2. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; provide one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. 3. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; provide one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 4. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. 5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Ready-Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted when concrete does not meet strength requirements specified and/or when required by the Architect. E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 04200- UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Repair fireplaces with clay unit masonry in the form of brick. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Samples for verification purposes of the following: 1. Full-size units for clay masonry unit required, showing full range of exposed color, texture, and dimensions to match existing fireplaces. 2. Colored masonry mortar samples to match existing mortar. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Unit Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures,"except as otherwise indicated. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During repair, cover surrounding floor with waterproof sheeting. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar or soil that comes in contact with such masonry. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced masonry unit standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.2 CLAY MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with the following requirements applicable to each form of brick required: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with all exposed surfaces finished for ends of UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 sills, caps, and similar applications that expose brick surfaces that otherwise would be concealed from view. B. Face Brick Standard: ASTM C 216 and as follows: 1. Match existing brick. C. Fire brick: 1. Match existing brick. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2-cup dry measure) and laundry detergent(1/2-cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Masonry Unit: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a Type N. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced masonry unit standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. B. Thickness: Build composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, jointing and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. 3.2 REPOINTING, REPAIRING,AND CLEANING A. Repoint joints in masonry fireplaces when the mortar is eroded more than 1/2 the thickness of the joint from the face of the masonry unit, hairline cracks run through the mortar, the bond between mortar and brick is broken, or the mortar is soft and crumbly, so that it is easily removed with the point of a screwdriver. B. Mortar joints shall be raked out at least 1/2", or if the joint is more than 1/2"thick, to a depth as great as the joint. C. Filling joints shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. To ensure a good bond with brick, brush all loose fragments anddust from the joint with a soft brush and/or flush them with water. Wet the cleaned joints just enough to dampen the surface before applying the mortar. 2. Apply mortar with a "hawk" and a pointer's trowel, in thin 1/4"layers. Allow each layer to become "thumbprint hard" before applying the next layer. 3. A few minutes after placing the final layer of mortar, scrape thewall carefully with a trowel UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 to remove any excess mortar. Sweep over the bricks with a stiff bristle brush in a diagonal direction to remove remaining mortar and to smooth joint. When mortar is "thumbprint hard",tool the surface to a concave joint matching the original. 4. Mist the wall surface periodically to avoid premature drying with a fine fog spray. D. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units. Fill all cleaned, wet joints with fresh mortar.Tool mortar surfaces to match the original. E. Anal Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, dean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised"using the following masonry cleaner: a Job-mixed detergent solution. F. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure masonry unit is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6, Section 06200, "Finish Carpentry"for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 2. Division 6, Section 06401, "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood ornamental trim and related items. 3. Stripping of existing wood finishes, field painting, and sealant are specified in Division 9, Section 09900, "Painting". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed to view. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species: 1. "No. 2" grade. 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules. B. For structural framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider), provide the following grade and species: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. "No. 2" grade or better. 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including nailers, blocking, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "No. 2 Boards"per SPIB rules. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact or in an area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and with flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural quality);ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity and where indicated. 2.6 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 3. Above ground wood indicated to be pressure treated (PT) on the Drawings. C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Replace all damaged, rotted or missing pieces of wood. B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. D. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated. C. Anchor and nail to comply with the following: 1. "Table 1705.1 - Fastening Schedule,"of the Standard Building Code. D. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. To wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal framing anchors. 2. To wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal joist hangers. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6, Section 06200, "Finish Carpentry"for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 2. Division 6, Section 06401, "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood ornamental trim and related items. 3. Stripping of existing wood finishes, field painting, and sealant are specified in Division 9, Section 09900, "Painting". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed to view. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species: 1. "No. 2"grade. 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules. B. For structural framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider), provide the following grade and species: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. "No. 2" grade or better. 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including nailers, blocking, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "No. 2 Boards"per SPIB rules. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact or in an area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and with flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity and where indicated. 2.6 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 3. Above ground wood indicated to be pressure treated (PT) on the Drawings. C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Replace all damaged, rotted or missing pieces of wood. B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. D. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated. C. Anchor and nail to comply with the following: 1. "Table 1705.1 - Fastening Schedule,"of the Standard Building Code. D. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. To wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal framing anchors. 2. To wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal joist hangers. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, and which is not specified as part of other sections. B. Types of finish carpentry work in the section include: 1. Interior board siding. 2. Handicapped ramp decking and railing. C. Rough carpentry is specified in Division 6, Section 06100, "Rough Carpentry". D. Wood ornamental trim, moldings and related items are specified in Division 6, Section 06401, "Interior Architectural Woodwork". E. Wood doors and windows are specified in Division 8, Section 08212, "Wood Doors" and Section 08610, "Wood Windows". F. Stripping of existing wood surfaces, field painting, and sealant are specified in Division 9, Section 09900, "Painting". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient product capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish carpentry to match existing. 1. Exterior standing and running trim: 2'-0" long x full board or molding width, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Siding: 2'-0" long, finished on one side and one edge. 3. Exterior miscellaneous ornamental trim and moldings: one of each type used, unfinished. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on record drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. B. Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provision of the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI) "Quality Standards". 2.2 MATERIALS: A. General: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and patterns as shown, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide seasoned (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. B. Exterior Finish Carpentry: 1. Decking and Rails: Provide lumber worked to pattern and size as shown on the Drawings and complying with the following requirements including those of grading agency indicated: a Species: Southern Pine. 1) Pressure treated. b. Texture: Surfaced (Smooth). C. Interior Finish Carpentry: 1. Interior Beadboard Siding: Provide 1x4 T&G beadboard siding complying with the following requirements of grading agency indicated: a Species: Southern Pine. 1. Grade: Clear b. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 2. Interior Siding: Provide siding shaped, sized, etc., to match existing and complying with the following requirements of grading agency indicated: a Species: Southern Pine. 1. Grade: Clear b. Texture: Surfaced (smooth).. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications. a Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Replace all damaged, rotted or missing pieces. B. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. C. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements of section on painting within Division 9 for primers and their application. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/16" in 8'-0" for plumb and level; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor all finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. C. Refer to Division-9 sections for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work. D. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 06401 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim and rails. 2. Interior miscellaneous ornamental items. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this section. 3. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for location of door trim repairs. Door trim repair is part of this Section. 4. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for location of window trim repairs. Window trim repair is part of this Section. 5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for back priming and finishing of exterior architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and AWI quality grade indicated, unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/32 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Provide boards machine shaped, sized, etc., to match existing. C. Grade: Custom. D. Lumber Species: Southern Pine or Architect approved equal. E. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 2.4 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Provide boards machine shaped, sized, etc., to match existing. C. Grade: Custom. D. Lumber Species: Southern Pine or Architect approved equal. E. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR CLEAR FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Provide boards machine shaped, sized, etc., to match existing. C. Grade: Custom. D. Lumber Species: Old Heart Southern Pine or Architect approved equal. E. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 2.6 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR CLEAR FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Provide boards machine shaped, sized, etc., to match existing. C. Grade: Custom. D. Lumber Species: Old Heart Southern Pine. E. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 2.7 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. B. Nails: Provide the following of type and size required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. 1. Finish nails. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with requirements of AWI Section 1700 "Installation of Woodwork (Interior)" that refer to types of woodwork specified in this section and that apply to the same grade specified in Part 2 of this section. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06401 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 07200- INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The work of this Section includes the following: 1. Building insulation in batt form between first floor joists and attic floor joists. 2. Loose-fill building insulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1" thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a CertainTeed Corp. b. Manville Corp. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS: A. General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for materials, compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics. 1. Performed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths. B. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less);foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face, and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. 2. Combustion Characteristics: Unfaced blanket/batt passes ASTM E 136 test. INSULATION 07200 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. 4. Ranged Units: Provide blankets/batts fabricated with facing incorporating 4-inch-wide flanges along their edges for attachment to framing members. 5. Thermal Resistivity: Provide blankets/batts fabricated with an r-value of 19 minimum. C. Glass Fiber Loose Fill Insulation: Glass fibers processed to comply with ASTM C 764 for Type (method of application) indicated below; maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 5, respectively, and as follows: 1. Type 1 for pneumatic application. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS: A. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size of staples recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. C. Tape: Standard duct tape. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. A satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and related work is specified. Obtain Installer's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor barriers, including removal of projections which might puncture vapor barriers. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. D. Place glass fiber loose fill insulation into spaces by machine-blowing. Level horizontal applications to full uniform thickness, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not excessively compact. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION: A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder up in attic and down on first floor joists. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure air-tight installation. C. Set reflective foil-faced units accurately with air space in front of foil as shown. Provide not less than 0.75" air space where possible. 3.4 PROTECTION: A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical abuses. END OF SECTION 07200 INSULATION 07200 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 08212—WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes reconditioning and making operational all existing doors and new doors to match the existing. B. Extent of work and location of each door is indicated on drawings and door schedule. The door schedule is intended as an initial survey of the conditions. The actual scope of the work will be determined by the Contractors field survey. C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Interior woodwork in juxtaposition to doors and transoms is specified in Division 6, Section 06401 "Interior Architectural Wood work". 2. Stripping of existing finishes, field painting, and sealant are specified in Division 9, Section 09900 "Painting". 3. Hardware is specified in Division 8, Section 08710 " Door Hardware". 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All doors shall be made structural sound and fully operational. Exterior doors shall prevent water penetration into the interior. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Door Schedule: The door schedule, included at the end of this Section, generally describes the Work required. B. Field survey: Verify existing door, hardware and transom conditions by an accurate field survey prior to reconditioning. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Field Survey Results: Submit final hardware schedule showing differences between the door schedule and the field survey results. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Any wood used in reconditioning to be clear southern yellow heart pine or other species and grade approved by Architect. B. Glass: 1. Match existing type and thickness for doors and transoms. C. Glazing Putty: Standard glazers putty compatible with all surfaces, materials and exposure conditions. D. Insect Screen Fabric: 18 x 16 or 18 x 14 mesh of Bronze wire. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Remove and repair damaged units as indicated or as required. B. Weatherstrip around doors indicated in door schedule. C. Repair any damaged doors to match original design and construction. D. Trim or splice doors as required to match and fit door opening and frame. WOOD DOORS 08212 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 E. Hang doors plumb, freely operating and in the manner shown on the Drawings. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces after finishing. Take care to avoid damage to finish. Remove excess putty, paint, sealant, dirt and other substances. Wash glass on both faces by method recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect doors from damage until time of Substantial Completion. DOOR SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR MARK SCOPE OF WORK A Remove chain latch. Remove existing dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. Remove, clean, paint, and reinstall existing hinges. Install new dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. B Remove chain latch. Remove existing dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. Remove, clean, paint, and reinstall existing hinges. Install new dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. C Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. D Remove chain latch. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Install new dead bolt. E Remove chain latch. Remove existing dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. Remove, clean, paint, and reinstall existing hinges. Install new dead bolt, latch set, knob, trim and strike plate. F Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. G Remove metal hanger from door. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Install new dead bolt and slide bolt. H Remove chain latch. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. J Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. K Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. L Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. M Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. N Repair door. Repair threshold. Remove existing hardware. Install new double-acting hardware. O Install new or salvaged door to match existing frame dimensions and style to match door D. Install new latch set, knob,trim and strike plate. SECOND FLOOR A Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Repair threshold. Install new dead bolt. B Repair door. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. C Trim door to properly close and latch. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. D Remove metal hanger from door. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. E Remove slide bolt. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. F Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. G Remove metal hanger from door. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. H Remove metal hanger from door. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. I Remove slide bolt. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. WOOD DOORS 08212 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 DOOR SCHEDULE SECOND FLOOR MARK SCOPE OF WORK J Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Repair threshold. K Remove slide bolt. Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Install new slide bolt. L Remove, repair as required, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Replace missing cap on head trim to match existing. M Remove, repair as required, dean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. Remove metal hanger from door. Install new slide bolt. Install new strike plate to match existing. END OF SECTION 08212 WOOD DOORS 08212 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 08610—WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for all existing windows: 1. Reconditioning all rotten, damaged or otherwise unsound window sash. 2. Making operational all existing windows,unless noted to be fixed inplace, including replacement or rehanging sash cords and weights. 3. Reglazing and reputtying of existing windows. 4. Replacement of damaged or missing window hardware. 5. Installation of existing window screens and hardware. 6. Construction of new window screens. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to to this section: 1. Interior wood trim not included in this section is specified in Division 6, Section 06200 "Finish Carpentry". 2. Stripping of existing finishes, field painting, and sealant are specified in Division 9, Section 09900 "Painting". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Hardware: Submit sample for each hardware item specified. C. Field Survey: Submit results of field survey in the form of a revised window schedule. Indicate where field survey results differ from window schedule. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: All reconditioned and new custom window units shall be made fully operational, unless noted to be fixed inplace, and have no water penetration. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: Provide new window units by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those on this project. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Window Schedule: The window schedule, which is included at the end of this Section, generally describes the Work required. B. Field survey: Verify existing window, hardware and transom conditions by an a c cu rate f i e I d survey prior to reconditioning. The actual scope of work will be determined by the field survey. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear Southern Pine or other approved lumber that has been kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and is free of finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets and surface checks. 1. Sash lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with NWWDA I.S.4. B. Glass: Use clear float glass to match existing size and thickness or salvaged plate glass from other historical structures. WOOD WINDOWS 08610 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 C. Glazing Putty: Standard glazers putty compatible with all surfaces, materials and exposure conditions. D. Fasteners: Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation. E. Hardware: Provide hardware as indicated in the Window Schedule and as specificied below: 1. Sash Locks. a Type A: Custom cast iron or bronze from sample supplied by Architect. b. Type B: Renovators Supply, 1 800 659 2211, item number 70009. 2. Hinge: Solid brass construction, sized to fit sash. 3. Sash Handle: Match existing. 4. Screen Hardware: Match existing. 5. Operators: Provide hardware as indicated in the Window Schedule and as specificied below: a Solid Brass Support#32102 Woodworker's Store 21801 Industrial Blvd. Rogers, MN 55374-9514 Telephone 612-428-3200 2.2 FABRICATION A. Provide fabricators custom units to match existing. Comply with indicated standards and materials. B. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware and other work at project site when possible. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Repair frames and sashes indicated in schedule. Match existing. B. Glaze units indicated in schedule. C. Install refinished or new hardware as indicated in scheduleand as specified. D. Install existing window screens and screen hardware. Provide new screen and hardware if not existing. Match existing. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces after finishing. Take care to avoid damage to finish. Remove excess putty, paint, sealant, dirt and other substances. Wash glass on both faces by method recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Remove and replace any glass that has been damaged during construction.. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration until time of substantial completion. WOOD WINDOWS 08610 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 WINDOW SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR MARK WORK REQUIRED 1 Repair stop. Free sash weight. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 2 Repair stop. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 3 Remove drapery hardware. 4 Remove drapery hardware. 5 Remove drapery hardware. 6 Remove drapery hardware. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 7 Remove drapery hardware. 8 Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 9 Repair stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 10 Repair stop. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 11 Repair stop. Replace broken glass. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 12 Replace right stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 13 Repair right stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 14 Repair right and left stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 15 Remove drapery hardware. Replace left and right sash weight chord. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 16 Remove drapery hardware. Replace right stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 17 Remove drapery hardware. Replace left and right sash weight chord. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 18 Remove drapery hardware. Replace left and right sash weight chord. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 19 Remove drapery hardware. Replace right sash weight chord. Remove, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware with Type B. 20 Replace missing trim. Replace missing sash weights. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 21 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 22 Replace broken sash lock with Type A. SECOND FLOOR MARK WORK REQUIRED 23 Remove drapery hardware. Remove and replace warped mullion on top sash. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 24 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 25 Replace left and right sash weight chords. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 26 Remove and replace warped mullion on top sash. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 27 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 28 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 29 Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 30 Remove and replace warped mullion on top sash. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 31 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 32 Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 33 Remove drapery hardware. Remove and replace warped mullion on bottom sash. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 34 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 35 Remove drapery hardware. Replace broken sash lock with Type B. 36 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 37 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 38 Remove drapery hardware. Replace missing sash handle. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. 39 Remove drapery hardware. Replace missing sash handle. Replace missing sash lock with Type B. Replace left and right sash weight chords. WOOD WINDOWS 08610 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 WINDOW SCHEDULE SECOND FLOOR MARK WORK REQUIRED 40 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 41 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. 42 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 43 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. 44 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 45 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 46 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. 47 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 48 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 49 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. 50 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 51 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 52 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. 53 Repair frame. Repair stops. Replace missing trim. Fix sash inplace. 54 Repair frame. Repair stop. Replace missing trim. Install new hinges and convert to awning window. Install new operator. 55 Repair frame. Repair stop. Replace missing trim. Install new hinges and convert to awning window. Install new operator. 56 Remove drapery hardware. Replace left sash weight chord. Remove, clean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 57 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, dean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 58 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, dean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 59 Remove drapery hardware. Remove, dean, paint and reinstall existing hardware. 60 Remove drapery hardware. Replace broken glass. Replace broken sash lock with Type A. 61 Remove drapery hardware. Replace broken glass. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. 62 Remove drapery hardware. Repair stop. Replace missing sash lock with Type A. END OF SECTION 08610 WOOD WINDOWS 08610 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Stripping of existing finishes and painting are specified in Division 9, Section 09900 "Painting". 2. Replacement hardware required is listed in the Door Schedule in Division 8, Section 08212 "Wood Doors". 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The Work primarily consists of removal, repair and refinishing of existing door hardware. Existing hardware will be reused to the greatest extent possible. Existing hardware not reused will be turned over to the owner. Extent of new finish hardware required is indicated in the Door Schedule. New finish hardware shall match existing similiar conditions. B. Types of new finish hardware required include the following: 1. Double acting hinges 2. Strike plates 3. Keys 4. Locks and latch sets 5. Slide Bolts 6. Weatherstripping for exterior doors 7. Knobs and Trim 8. Stops 9. Deadbolts 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" providing complete designations of every item required for each door. Include: a Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. Include manufacturer's photograph to confirm match with existing. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings and in Door Schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. f. Keying information. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SPECIFIED HARDWARE: A. One or more manufacturers are listed for each hardware type required. Provide either one the products designated or an Architect approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. General: 1. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement. 2. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 3. Furnish screws as required to replace missing or damaged existing screws. New screws to match existing. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish. 2.3 DOUBLE ACTING HINGES: A. Provide hinges as follows: 1. Item#721, by Brian Leo, telephone 612-861-1473 2. Item#22083, by Renovator's Supply, telephone 413-659-2211 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING: A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions. 2.5 LATCHES, KNOBS AND STRIKES: A. Provide latch sets, knobs and strikes to match existing supplied by: Florida Victorian Architectural Antiques 112 West Georgia Avenue Deland, FL 32720 904-734-9300 or Architect approved equal. 2.6 SLIDE BOLTS: A. As indicated in the door schedule , provide slide bolts of one of the following types: 1. Type A: The Antique Hardware Store, Tiurelephone 1 800 4229982, Item 19Q3 2. Type B: Stanley heavy duty 6"brass barrel bolt. 2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf and transom. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated and to match weatherstripping. B. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: 1. Provide "V'Cushion Bronze B75 by Pemko Inc. C. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: 1. Provide doorshoe 234AV by Pemko Inc. 2.8 STOPS: A. Provide custom made stops to match existing. 2.9 Double Acting Hardware: A. Provide hinge #825-942 by Woodworkers Supply (800-645-9292) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 C. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 08800-GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of glass and glazing work is the replacement of cracked, broken or otherwise damaged existing material. B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 1. Window units. 2. Doors and transoms. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit,for verification purposes, 3"square samples of each type of glass required. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL: A. Provide glass which matches the existing material to be replaced. B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings requiring replacement, with edge clearances and tolerances to meet industry standards. Provide thicknesses which match the existing material to be replaced. 2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS: A. General: Provide products complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing compounds of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products and glazing channel substrates. 2. Appearance: To match similar existing conditions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL: A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of glazing compound and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.2 GLAZING: A. Remove broken or damaged glass from frame. Remove old putty and glazer's points and sand frame smooth on all sides. B. Apply primers to frame surfaces to prevent absorption of oil from glazing compound. C. Apply thin bed of glazing compound along all sides of frame to cushion the glass against stress and leakage.. D. Set units of glass against glazing compound and tap in glazier's points 4 to 6 inches apart, driving them half way into frame. E. Form glazing compound into a rope 3/8" in diameter. Press compound into groove along edges of glass. F. Tool glazing compounds to provide a substantial"wash"away from glass and form a neat triangular bead. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Protect glass from breakage throughout the construction period. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. D. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspection intended to establish date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09200- LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes repair of existing plaster with the following: 1. Metal lathing. 2. Gypsum plastering. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Veneer Plaster"for gypsum veneer plaster. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with the requirements. C. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with requirements. D. Samples (in place) of finished plaster work which will be used to judge acceptability of match to existing. Obtain approval of Architect prior to beginning plaster work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of wall and ceiling components with other work supported by or penetrating through wall or ceiling. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum lath and gypsum plaster from a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation. C. Handle gypsum lath to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster. B. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), maintain continuous uniform temperature of not less than 55 deg F nor more than 70 deg F for not less than 1 week prior to beginning plaster application, during its application, and until plaster is dry but for not less than one week after application is complete. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydration of plaster. Begin ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and continue until it sets. D. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects that might result from plastering. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Expanded Metal Lath: a Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. d. Western Metal Lath Co. 2. Accessories: a Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. Keene Corp. d. MM Systems Corp. e. Plastic Components, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. g. Western Metal Lath Co. 3. Gypsum Plasters: a Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. b. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 LATH A. Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below. 1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a Configuration: Flat. 1) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. B. Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath. 2.3 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR GYPSUM PLASTER A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 841; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Wood Corner Beads: Type as indicated below. 1. Type: To match existing. C. Strip Reinforcement: Smooth-edge strips of expanded metal lath fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; in the following forms: 1. Cornerite: Strips prebent lengthwise in center for internal plaster angles not otherwise reinforced by metal lath lapped or carried around. 2. Stripite: Flat strips for reinforcing joints in gypsum lath, nonmetallic bases, and between dissimilar plaster bases. D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with short or expanded flanges to suit kinds of plaster bases indicated; of the following material: 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized)steel. E. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. 2. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. a Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. 2.4 GYPSUM PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base Coat Plasters: ASTM C 28, types as indicated below: LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. Gypsum neat plaster. B. Finish Coat Plasters: Types as indicated below: 1. Gypsum ready-mixed finished plaster, manufacturer's standard mill-mixed gauged interior finish. C. Finishing Hydrated Limes: ASTM C 206,type as indicated below: 1. Type N: Normal hydrated lime for finishing purposes. D. Aggregates for Base Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35, types as indicated below: 1. Sand aggregate, unless otherwise indicated. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Gypsum Neat Plasters: a Red Top Gypsum Plaster; United States Gypsum Co. b. Red Top Two-Purpose Plaster; United States Gypsum Co. c. Two-Way Hardwall Plaster; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Ready-Mixed Finish Plaster: a Red Top Finish; United States Gypsum Co. 3. Finishing Hydrated Limes, Type N: a Red Top Normal Hydrate Finish Limes; United States Gypsum Co. b. Grand Prize Normal Hydrate Finish Limes; U. S. Gypsum Co. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. 2.6 GYPSUM PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions that correspond to application methods and plaster bases indicated below: 1. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats, as indicated below: a Scratch Coat: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand. b. Brown Coat: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand. 2.7 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL A. Interior Lathing and Furring Installation Standard: Install lathing and furring materials indicated for gypsum plaster to comply with ASTM C 841. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum plaster manufacturer or, if not available, of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. 3.2 METAL LATHING A. Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards. 1. Repair of walls and ceilings using 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. minimum weight diamond mesh lath. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. B. Accessories for Gypsum Plaster: Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: 1. Corner Beads: Install at external corners. 2. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work, except where plaster passes behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or metal frames and act casing beads. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced standard and recommended by plaster manufacturer and approved by Architect. 3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10'-0"straightedge placed at any location on surface. B. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. C. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. D. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards. E. Concealed Plaster: Where plaster application will be concealed by wood paneling, above suspended ceilings and similar locations, finish coat may be omitted; where concealed behind cabinets and similar furnishings and equipment, apply finish coat; where used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, omit finish coat and coordinate thickness with overall dimension as shown and comply with tolerances specified. 3.5 GYPSUM PLASTER APPLICATION A. Interior Gypsum Plaster Application Standard: Apply gypsum plaster materials, composition, mixes, and finishes indicated to comply with ASTM C 842. B. Number of Coats: Apply gypsum plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements. 1. Use three-coat work over the following plaster bases: a Metal lath. b. Existing wood lath. C. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: 1. Finish for gypsum finish coat plasters to match finish of existing plaster, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to the substrate has failed. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09215- VENEER PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of veneer plaster construction: 1. Gypsum base screw-attached to wood framing and furring members. 2. One-component veneer plastering over gypsum base. B. Wood framing and furring are specified in Division 6"Rough Carpentry" Section. C. Glass mesh mortar units for application of tile are specified in Division 9 Section "Tile." D. Repair of existing plaster is specified in Division 9 Section "Lath and Plaster". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced ' standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain veneer plaster products (gypsum base, joint reinforcing, and veneer plaster)from a single manufacturer for each veneer plaster system indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum base flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum base to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application of veneer plaster to comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For application of veneer plaster, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) nor more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) for one week prior to application and continuously thereafter until veneer plaster has fully dried. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster near heat source. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for hydration of veneer plaster materials. Avoid conditions which result in veneer plaster drying too rapidly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Veneer Plaster Products: a Georgia Pacific Corp. VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum boards of type indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints. 1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses in either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 844 for application system indicated, existing support spacing and to match existing plaster and lath thickness. B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588, of types indicated below; with square or tapered long edges as standard with manufacturer; and as follows: 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Regular Type Gypsum Base: a "Dens-Cote Plaster Base"; Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. "Tapered Edge Kal-Kore Regular"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. "IMPERIAL Gypsum Base"; United States Gypsum Co. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Provide cornerbeads to match existing and edge trim of material and shapes indicated below which comply with ASTM C 1047 and veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations for application indicated: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper;with metal complying with follow requirement: a Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. 2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047: a "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint reinforcing materials indicated which comply with joint strength requirements of ASTM C 587 and are acceptable to veneer plaster manufacturer for application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Open-weave glass fiber fabric. C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape: As recommended by veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material indicated. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Glass Fiber Joint Tape: a "Kal-Mesh"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. b. "IMPERIAL Tape"; United States Gypsum Co. 2. Embedding Material for Glass Fiber Tape: a "Uni-Kal Plaster";Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. b. "IMPERIAL Basecoat"; United States Gypsum Co. c. "DIAMOND Interior Finish"; United States Gypsum Co. 2.5 VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. One-Component Regular Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, manufacturer's standard one-component veneer plaster for application directly over the following without use of separate base coat material. 1. Substrate: Gypsum base. B. Finish Coat Aggregate: For sand-float finish, provide white silica sand passing a 30-mesh screen. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One-Component Regular Veneer Plaster: a "Dens-Cote"; Georgia-Pacific Corp. VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 b. "Uni-Kal Plaster";Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. "DIAMOND Interior Finish"; United States Gypsum Co. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for veneer plaster construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of veneer plaster manufacturer. B. Gypsum Base Screws: ASTM C 1002. 2.7 VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix veneer plaster materials to comply with referenced veneer plaster application standard and with recommendations of veneer plaster manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates which veneer plaster construction attaches to or abuts with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of veneer plaster construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BASE, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 844. B. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16 inch offsets between planes of gypsum base faces, and 1/8 inch in 8'-0"for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of base. D. Install gypsum base for ceilings across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. E. Install gypsum base for walls/partitions in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install gypsum base horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F. Install gypsum base with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. G. Attach gypsum base to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. H. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum base over wood framing with "floating" internal corner construction. I. Space fasteners in application of gypsum base to comply with referenced gypsum base application standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 METHODS OF GYPSUM BASE APPLICATION A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum base as follows: 1. On ceilings apply gypsum base prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum base vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which minimize end joints. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM A. General: Where feasible, Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 fasten gypsum base to supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at external corners. Match existing beads in size, shape and location. C. Install metal edge trim where edge of gypsum base would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. 1. Install "LC" bead where veneer plaster construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. D. Install metal corner beads at external corners of veneer plaster work. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforce interior angles and flat joints in gypsum base with joint tape and embedding material to comply with referenced gypsum veneer plaster application standard and with veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application Standard: Apply gypsum veneer plaster to comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's directions. B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit veneer plaster in the following areas where plaster will be concealed from view in completed Work, but do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings and similar removable items: 1. Behind or under wood paneling and under other permanently applied wall or ceiling finishes. C. Provide texture finish to matching existing plaster. D. Grounds: Where frames and other units in the veneer plastering act as grounds (not including trim accessories)for flush plastering, groove finish coat at juncture with the other work. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings used to protect other work. B. Remove plaster spillage promptly from door frames, windows and other adjoining work. Repair surfaces which have been damaged by plastering work. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures veneer plaster work being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09215 VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09300-TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Cementitious backer units. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition"for removal of existing tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F(10 deg C)or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: a American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal-Tile Corp. TILE 09300 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 c. Mid-State Tile Co. d. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Mortars: a American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C-Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L&MMfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. I. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile"for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials compling with the following requirements: 1. Color: White. 2. Provide tile wainscot 42"high from finished floor for HC Restroom walls. 3. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back-mounted or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements. 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: a Floor: 1 inch by 1 inch. b. Walls: 2 inches by 2 inches. 3. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with cushion edges. B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved. b. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap. c. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with a radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted cove corners, and use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. TILE 09300 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 C. Accessories for Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated and in color to match adjoining glazed wall tile. 1. One roll paper holder at water closet in first floor handicapped restroom. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.1 and as specified below. 1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), or polyethylene sheeting ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick. 2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches - WO.3 by WO.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625 inch diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 3. Latex additive(water emulsion)described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. a Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion)of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix a Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2.6 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS(GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS) A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following requirements: 1. Vinyl-Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a continuous process from aggregated portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl-coated woven glass fiber mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured; fabricated in panels 1/2-inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48, 60, and 72 inches long; and weighing 3 lbs psf. B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer of cementitious backer units. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. "Wonder-Board"; Modulars Inc. 2. "Durock Tile Backer Board"; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout, is compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content;type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. TILE 09300 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: 1. Grout release. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile"that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts comply with ANSI A108.10. H. Behind wall tile, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's instructions for type of application indicated. 3.4 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1 a Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5., Wood Subfloors, Interior: TCA F141. b. Grout: SLatex-portland cement. 3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS TILE 09300 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting-bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types: 1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. a Wood or Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243. b. Cementitious Backer Units, Interior: TCA W244. c. Grout: Latex-portland cement. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Rush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09300 TILE 09300 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09550-WOOD FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the repair or replacement of any damaged existing wood flooring and stair treads, sanding and finishing of the existing and replacement wood strip flooring and stair treads. B. Wood substrates are specified in Division 6. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit three, minimum 6" long, samples of wood flooring to be used in the replacement of any existing flooring. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in repair and refinishing of heart pine flooring. B. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring from a single source, to ensure match to the existing flooring of quality, color, pattern and texture. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Moisture Content: At time of delivery, limit average moisture content of wood flooring to 12%, with 14%max. for any piece. B. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with installation of wood flooring until spaces are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for a minimum of 5 days prior to start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 70 deg. F and 80 deg. F before, during, and after installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 REPLACEMENT WOOD STRIP FLOORING: A. Provide the following wood strip flooring wherever replacement flooring is required: 1. Species: Longleaf Southern Yellow Pine Heartwood. 2. Grade to match existing. 3. Cut to match existing. 4. Pattern: Provide tongued-and-grooved to match existing. 5. Thickness to match existing. 6. Lengths: Provide random length strips to match existing. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR WOOD FLOORING: A. Asphalt Saturated Felt: 15 lb. type, ASTM D 226. B. Fasteners: As recommended by NOFMA in "Installation Manual." C. Polyurethane Finish: Moisture curing type gloss polyurethane finish, specially compounded for multiple-coat application on wood floors. D. Threshold: 2" wide wood threshold molding, tapered each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate finish wood flooring. Provide in species and finish to match wood WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 flooring. E. Reducer Strip: 4" wide tapered reducer strip in thickness, species and finish to match wood flooring PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine substrates on which wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with instructions and recommendations by NOFMA in "Hardwood Flooring Installation Material". B. Pattern: Match pattern or direction of existing wood flooring. C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring, not less than 1/2". D. Wood Strip Flooring Installation: 1. Blind nail flooring to substrate in accordance with NOFMA recommendations. Selection of nail type is Installer's option. 2. Felt Underlayment: If existing flooring is installed over a layer of asphalt saturated felt, install replacement flooring over a new layer of asphalt saturated felt. 3.3 SANDING AND FINISHING: A. After all flooring repair is complete, machine sand existing and replacement flooring to remove offsets and non-level conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks which would be visually noticeable after finishing. Use 3 grades of sandpaper, ending with 00 grade. Vacuum clean and immediately apply finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until finish is completed. Cover sanded floor with building paper to provide access for application of first finish coats. B. Apply 3 coats of satin urethane finish, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION: A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09660-VINYL TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of floor tile specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D. Installer certificates signed by floor covering manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. E. Maintenance data for vinyl tile floor coverings, to include in the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F(10 deg C) and 90 deg F(32 deg C). C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F(21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C). B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 tiles, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of floor tile installed. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide 12"x12" Kentile Marblized Shannon Green 506 tile or an Architect approved equal. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit vinyl tile floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. For wood subfloors verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain vinyl tile floor coverings. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive vinyl tile floor coverings. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer's direction to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by sheet vinyl floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction alternating between reversed in adjacent tiles. D. Where items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. END OF SECTION 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 09900-PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface stripping, surface preparation, priming, painting and sealant for exposed interior items and surfaces. 1. Priming and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and painting specified under related sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. C. Painting is not required on concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a Attic spaces. 2. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or nomenclature plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Samples for paint stripping method approval. 1. Submit sample of stripping method used on actual building component prior to commencing general stripping work. Minimum size of samples shall be as follows a Wood Trim: 3'of length of each type or pattern. b. Hardware: one complete component. C. Samples for initial color selection approval. 1. Apply sample to each color used on actual building component to be finished. Minimum size of samples shall be as follows a Walls, Ceilings and Floors: an area 3'x3'. b. Trim: 3'of length. c. Hardware: one complete component. 2. Notify Architect of color sample applications and do not proceed until written approval of color samples has been received from the Architect. 3. Colors specified in the Finish Schedule are Benjamin Moore and Co. color names and numbers. Color matches are the Contractors responsibility. Color samples not approved shall be remixed and reapplied until approved by the Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: 1. Notify the Architect of any problems anticipated using the materials specified with the substrate. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. PAINTING 09900 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F(10 deg C) and 90 deg F(32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F(7 deg C) and 95 deg F(35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint or sealant in rain, fog or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Primer and paint manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. The Glidden Company(Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 5. Pratt and Lambert(P&L). 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.2 STRIPPERS A. Finish stripper: 1. Chemical: Dad's Easy Spray Paint Remover by Sansher Corporation, 8005 N. Clinton Street, Ft. Wayne, IN 46825 (219)484-2000 or Architect approved manufacturer. 2. Heat: Heat gun or heat plate and scraper method. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior alkyd wood primer for priming wood under an acrylic emulsion finish: 1. Devoe: 1102 All-Weather Alkyd House Paint Primer. 2. Glidden: 3651 Spred House Paint Prime Coat. 3. Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100. 4. Pittsburgh: 1-70 or 1-870 Sun-Proof Exterior Wood Primer. 5. P&L: Permalize Exterior Primer. 6. S-W: A-100 Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer Y24W20. B. Interior Flat Latex-Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer on plaster under flat and semigloss alkyd finishes: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Rat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. 3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. 4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Rat Latex Paint. 5. P&L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. C. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal PAINTING 09900 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 on the exterior under flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 5. P&L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer. 2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over wood under an odorless alkyd semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P&L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49 B. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc-coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full-gloss alkyd enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P&L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater 649W200. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over prime-coated wood: 1. Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2. Glidden: 6500 Ultra Hide Spread House Paint. 3. Moore: Moorgard Latex House Paint #103. 4. Pittsburgh: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. 5. P&L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. 6. S-W: A100 Acrylic Latex Rat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. B. Medium-Shade, Exterior Acrylic Gloss Paint: Medium-shade acrylic gloss paint for use on the exterior over prime-coated wood trim, doors, and windows: 1. Devoe: Gloss House and Trim Paint. 2. Glidden: 5440 Spred Gloss Acrylic House Paint. 3. Moore: Moore's House Paint #110. 4. Pittsburgh: 1 Line Sun-Proof Midtone Base Wood Finish. 5. P&L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: SWP Exterior Gloss Paint A-2 Series. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Latex-Based Interior Rat Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for use as a flat finish over plaster, ferrous metal and zinc-coated(galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. 3. Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215. 4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Rat Latex Paint. 5. P&L: Vapex Latex Rat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. B. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low-odor, semigloss, alkyd enamel for use over a PAINTING 09900 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 primer and undercoat on plaster, wood and both ferrous and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel#235. 4. Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 5. P&L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 6. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. C. Interior Clear Polyurethane: Gloss finish polyurethane for use over wood surfaces. 1. Provide best quality product from one of the approved manufacturers. 2.7 SEALANT A. Provide a single component silicone sealant with a medium modulus. Adhere to ASTM C920 standards. Notify Architect immediately of any problems anticipated using materials specified with substrate. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely strip all exposed finishes using Architect approved method. B. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or sealant. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted and/or sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. D. Unprimed Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Putty or filler shall match the wood color on wood to receive a clear finish. Sand smooth when dried. E. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. F. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. PAINTING 09900 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Apply two component fiberglass resin waterproofing to all exposed decking end grain. Saturate wood and allow to cure prior to finishing. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 2. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. D. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. E. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Exterior Wood: 1. Low-Luster Finish:2 finish coats over primer. a Primer: Exterior Primer Coating. b. First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion. c. Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion. 2. Medium-Shade, Exterior Acrylic Gloss Paint: Medium-shade acrylic gloss paint for use on the exterior over prime-coated wood trim, doors, and windows: C. Interior Wood : 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish:3 coats. a Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. PAINTING 09900 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 b. First Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel. c. Second Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel. D. Interior Natural-Finish Wood: 1. Polyurethane Finish:3 Finish coats over sealer coat. a Sealer Coat: Thinned polyurethane. b. First Coat: Gloss Polyurethane. c. Second Coat: Gloss Polyurethane. d. Third Coat:Gloss Polyurethane. E. Plaster in Kitchen and Restrooms: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish:3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a Primer: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel. F. Plaster in areas other than Kitchen and Restrooms: 1. Odorless Lusterless(Flat) Latex Finish:2 coats. a Primer:Latex-Based Interior Rat Paint). b. Finish Coat: Interior Flat Odorless Alkyd Paint. G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 6 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 10425 -SIGNS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Cast metal plaques. a One exterior 18 inch by 24 inch plaque. b. One interior 4 inch by 12 inch plaque B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. 1. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques a Andco Industries Corp. b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Best Manufacturing Co. d. Gemini, Inc. e. Lake Shore Markers. f. Metal Arts, Division of L& H Manufacturing Co. g. OMC Industries, Inc. h. The Southwell Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Bronze Castings: Provide bronze castings, copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with the requirements of ASTM B 584. SIGNS 10425 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts. 2.3 CAST METAL PLAQUES A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to "Finish" article for other finish requirements. 1. Metal: Bronze. 2. Border Style: None (straight), polished edge. 3. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard leatherette finish. 4. Background Finish: Provide dark statuary finish to comply with the requirement specified for bronze finishes, except provide background texture specified above in lieu of mechanical finish indicated. 2.4 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations. C. Bronze Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by"CDA"conform to the system established by the Copper Development Association for designating finishes. 1. Natural Satin Finish: CDA-M31O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic coating. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS 10425 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 10522- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Mounting brackets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers from a single manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or an Architect approved equal: 1. Ansul Fire Protection, Wormald US Inc. 2. Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc. 3. Watrous Inc. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each location indicated on the Drawings in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer. 2. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated in plated finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in locations and at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. END OF SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9, Section 09300, "Tile"for HC Restroom Toilet Tissue Dispenser. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. C. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room)for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. D. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide toilet accessories by the manufacturer listed or an Architectet approved equal. 2.2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Single-Roll Dispenser: TP 16 by A. Ball Plumbing 503-228-0026. 2.3 COMBINATION TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE UNITS A. Recessed Unit: B 369 by Bobrick. 2.4 GRAB BARS A. Stainless Steel Type: B-6106, two 24 inch bars, by Bobrick. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Medicine Cabinet: 33018 by Kemp & George 800-343-4012 or 1731 by Home Decorator's Collection telephone 800-245-2217. B. Mop and Broom Holder: B233x24, by Bobrick. C. Robe Hooks: 1. Robe Hook A: B-211 by Bobrick. 2. Robe Hook B: CF175 Chrome, by A. Ball Plumbing 503-228-0026. 2.6 MIRROR UNITS A. Fixed Tilt Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Unit: B-293#1630 by Bobrick. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE First Floor: Handicapped Restroom Toilet paper holder specified in Section 09300 "Tile". Paper towel dispenser combo trash receptical Soap dish specified in Section 09300 "Tile". Grab bars Mirror Robe hook A Second Floor: Restroom Toilet paper holder Medicine Cabinet Robe hook B END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15010-BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1. 1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Mechanical installations. 7. Cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT,"for factory-installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections. 2. Division 15 Section"BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS,"for materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 15 plus general related specifications including: a Access to mechanical installations. b. Excavation for mechanical installations within the building boundaries, and from building to utilities connections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "SUBMITTALS." B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of mechanical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer. 1. Shop Drawings- Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue-or black-line prints. 2. Shop Drawings- Final Submittal: 1 additional blue-or black-line prints. 3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 4. Samples: 1 addition as set. C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT COORDINATION", to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. c. Equipment connections and support details. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures and other ceiling-mounted items. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and items requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 15 Section "MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION". Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent BUILDING lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified in Division 1 Section "FIELD ENGINEERING"to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulations, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH-IN BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements. 3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 15 Section "BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS". 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND PATCHING". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply: 1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be remove. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 1. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched 2. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. END OF SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15030- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 16. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specification section. C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators. B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches. E. Comply with National Electrical Code(NFPA 70). 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE; A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS: A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly-phase motors. 4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum 50 deg. C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A insulation). 5. Starting capability: frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors. 6. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase and 1.35 for single phase motors. 7. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except "C" where required for high torque. a Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. b. Bearings: 1. ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; 2. re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15030 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 inaccessible for regular maintenance; 3. designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor; 4. for fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted. c. Enclosure Type: 1. open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; 2. guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants; 3. weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. d. Overload protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. e. Noise rating: "Quiet". f. Efficiency: "Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. g. Nameplate: indicating the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features, and similar information. 2.2 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES,AND WIRING: A. Motor Starter Characteristics: 1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall have NEC proper Bass and division. 2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition. B. Manual switches shall have: 1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors. 2. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays. C. Magnetic Starters: 1. Maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated. 2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase. 3. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with control requirements of Division-15 Controls sections. 4. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds 240 volts. 5. Externally operated manual reset. 6. Under-voltage release or protection. D. Motor Connections: 1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are indicated. 2.3 CAPACITORS: A. Features: 1. Individual unit cells. 2. All welded steel housing. 3. Each capacitor internally fused. 4. Non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant. 5. Craft tissue insulation. 6. Aluminum foil electrodes. 7. KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90 per cent or better and shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and larger, that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 per cent at rated load. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15030 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 B. Disconnect Switches: 1. Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN"position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated. 2. Non-fusible switches: for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than 2 horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type. PART 3- EXECUTION(Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15030 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15050-BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section B. Requirements specified in Division 15 Section "BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS" apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with mechanical installations as follows: 1. Mechanical equipment nameplate data. 2. Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground piping (under the building and from building to utility connection) and equipment. 3. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 4. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 5. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions apply to excavation operations: 1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. 2. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course materials. 3. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement system. 4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following products: 1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Division 15 Section "BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS". E. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product. F. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under"Quality Assurance"article of this section. G. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details for dust and noise control. 1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 sealers, access panels, and doors. B. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply: 1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand. B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 per cent passing a 1 1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 per cent passing a No. 4 sieve. C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP;free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris;waste;frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. C. Hot Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications. F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated,type, grade, and class as required. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 per cent. B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels;APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue;thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less than 15/32 inches. 2.4 JOINT SEALERS A. General: Joint sealers,joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: 1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates;formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant: 1) "Chem-Calk N-Cure 2000", Bostic Construction Products Div. 2) "Dow Corning 790", Dow Corning Company. 3) "Siliglaze N SCS 2501", General Electric Co. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 4) "Silipruf SCS 2000", General Electric Co. 5) "864", Pecora Corp. 6) "Rhodorsil 5C", Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 7) "Spectrum 1", Tremco, Inc. 8) "Spectrum 2", Tremco, Inc. 9) "Dow Corning 795", Dow Corning Co. 10) "Rhodorsil 6B", Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 11) "Rhodorsil 70", Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 12) "Omniseal", Sonneborn Building Products Div. 13) "Chem-Calk 100", Bostik Construction Products Div. 14) "Gesil N SCS 2600", General Electric b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant: 1) "Dow•Corning 786", Dow Corning Corp. 2) "SCS 1702 Sanitary", General Electric Co. 3) "863 #345 White", Pecora Corp. 4) "Rhodorsil 6B White", Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 5) "OmniPlus", Sonneborn Building Products Div. D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, non-sag, mildew resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 per cent. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a "Chem-Calk 600", Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20", Pecora Corp. c. "Sonolac", Sonneborn Building Products Div. d. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834",Tremco, Inc. Part 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved. B. Materials and Equipment to be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage. C. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged. D. Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items: 1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures, and insulation. a Piping and ducts embedded in floors. walls, and ceilings may remain if such BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 materials do not interfere with new installations. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain. 2. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." E. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. F. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. G. Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows: 1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to an elevation below frost line. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed, tested, and the trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and pipe. 5. Excavate trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of pipe and equipment on undisturbed soil. a For pipes or equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint over-excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of the pipe of loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface. H. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 deg F(1 deg 2 C). Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials. 2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. For piping less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase. 5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials. J. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 4. Removal of trash and debris. K. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. L. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen, or contain frost or ice. M. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. N. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below: 1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defines moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils). a Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 per cent maximum density for cohesionless material. b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 per cent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 per cent relative density for cohesionless material. c. Other Areas : Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 per cent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 per cent relative density for cohesionless soils. 2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations. O. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas. 3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding:Comply with AWS " Structural Welding Code". 3.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.6 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. General:Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 sealants. B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15055- BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one section of Division 15 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation instructions. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Basic Mechanical Requirements section applies to the work at this Section. 2. Piping materials and installation methods peculiar to individual systems are specified within their respective system specification sections of Divisions 15. 3. Valves are specified in a separate section and in individual piping system sections of Division 15. 4. Expansion Compensation is specified in a separate section of Division 15. 5. Supports and Anchors are specified in a separate section of Division 15. 6. Mechanical Identification is specified in a separate section of Division 15. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Dielectric Unions and Fittings. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit welders' certificates specified in Quality Assurance below. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI Standard 831.1.0 - Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. C. Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer Uniformity: Conform with the requirements specified in Basic Mechanical Requirements, under "Product Options." B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering piping materials and specialties which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping materials and specialties from one of the following: 1. Pipe Escutcheons: a Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. c. Grinnel 2. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: a Epco Sales, Inc. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 15055 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 b. Victaulic Company of America 3. Dielectric Unions: a Eclipse, Inc. b. Perfection Corp. c. Watts Regulator Co. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 15 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that particular system. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS: A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder appropriate for each respective system. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, 816.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. B. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and Class 250 for high pressure service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. D. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly. 3.2 INSTALLATIONS: A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals. B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise. C. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 15055 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 permitted, unless expressly indicated on the Drawings. E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. F. Locate groups o f pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve, and short 3/4"threaded nipple and cap. H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6"shall be steel. 3.3 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES: A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. B. Remake leaking joints using new materials. C. Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems (water) 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections. END OF SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 15055 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15100- VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". 3. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems. B. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section"MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearance, and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME)Compliance: Comply with ASME 831.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation For Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling; set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set butterfly valves closed or slightly open; and block swing check valves in either closed or open position. B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures. C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, those listed in valve schedule. 2.2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL VALVES 15100 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems. 1. Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems. B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and temperatures. C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels,fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide plug valves with square heads; provide one wrench for every 10 plus valves. E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation. F. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications. 1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1. 2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. 3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. a Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80;Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon"impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 1. Do not use solder end valves for hot water heating piping applications. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Ball valves, 1-Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon"or"TFE"seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for domestic hot and cold water service. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position. C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or local indentation) and cleanliness. D. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment. E. Replace defective valves with new valves. 3.2 VALVE ENDS SELECTION A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends. 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS VALVES 15100 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. General Application: Use gate or ball valves for shut-off duty. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 3.4 SOLDER CONNECTIONS A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. D. Open gate valves to full open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs. F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush. 3.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation 3.8 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Nibco, Inc. 2. Hammond 3. Jenkins B. Gate Valves -2-Inch and Smaller: Bronze, bolted bonnet, rising or non-rising stem. THREADED THREADED SOLDER SOLDER MANUFACTURER NRS RS NRS RS Nibco T-136 T-135 S-136 S-134 END OF SECTION 15100 VALVES 15100 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15140-SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". 3. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". 4. "Expansion Compensation". 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports. 2. Vertical-piping clamps. 3. Hanger--rod attachments. 4. Building attachments. 5. Saddles and shields. 6. Spring hangers and supports. 7. Miscellaneous materials. 8. Pipe alignment guides. 9. Anchors. 10. Equipment supports. B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control"for vibration-isolation hangers and supports. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation"for pipe insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification sections. 1. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. 2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements. 3. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under"Quality Assurance"Article. 4. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 5. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal shield. Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement(ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure;comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers. B. Insulated piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacer (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME 831.9. 2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 through 3-1/2 12 0.048 4. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness s piping. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. D. Feld-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required;weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1. E. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded. F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment. 3.4 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachment and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. C. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" of these specifications. D. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15250-MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping Systems Insulation: a Fiberglass. b. Cellular Glass. c. Flexible Unicellular. d. Polyolefin. 2. Ductwork System Insulation: a Fiberglass. b. Cellular Glass. c. Flexible Unicellular. C. Refer to Division-15 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division-15 section "Low Pressure Ductwork"for duct linings; not work of this section. E. Refer to Division-15 section "Mechanical Identification"for installation of identification devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 3 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84(NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. 2. Exception: Industrial mechanical insulation that will not affect life safety egress of building may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance date and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping insulation type required, and of each duct and equipment insulation type required. Affix label to sample completely describing product. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation;remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering product which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Babcock and Wilcox; Insulating Products Div. 3. Certainteed Corp. 4. Knauf Aber Glass GmbH. 5. Manville Products Corp. 6. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. 7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type II, Class 2. C. Flexible Unicellular Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I. D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperature below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option. 1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. F. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. G. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1. B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4. C. Cellular Glass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. D. Flexible Unicellular Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 534,Type II. E. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient; Type II for ductwork below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. F. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. G. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 B. Cold Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: a Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet of roof outlet. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a Fiberglass: 1"thickness. b. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2"thickness. C. Hot Piping 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: a Potable hot water piping. 2. Insulate Potable hot water piping with fiberglass or flexible unicellular pipe insulation such that the heat loss is limited to a maximum of 17.5 Btu/hr per linear foot of pipe in accordance with the Florida Energy Efficiency Code. Submit certification of compliance for each type of insulation used. Minimum insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the following table, which is based on a design external temperature of 65 degrees F. Increase insulation for other external design temperatures and submit calculations with the certificate of compliance. SERVICE WATER MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS Temp. Range Non-Recirc Runouts up to 1"dia. 170 to 180 deg. 0.5 140 to 170 deg. 0.5 100 to 140 deg. 0.5 3. Insulate hot drain piping one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a Fiberglass: 1"thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1". b. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2"thick pipe sizes up to and including 1". 3.2 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Sub-Freezing Piping (0 to 39 degrees F) (-18 to 4 degrees C): 1. Application Requirements: Insulated the following sub-freezing HVAC piping systems: a Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation (except use cellular glass insulation for all direct buried applications): a Fiberglass: Insulation thickness(in inches) shall comply with the following table; Pipe 1"and 1-1/4" Sizes less to 2" Thickness 1 1-1/2 1) Runouts not exceeding 12' in length to individual terminal units shall have 1"thick insulation. 2) Add 1/2"thickness to piping insulation installed exposed to outdoor air. b. Cellular Glass: Insulation thickness (in inches) shall comply with the following table; Pipe 1"and 1-1/4" Sizes less 2" Thickness 1-1/2 1) Runouts not exceeding 12' in length to individual terminal units shall have 1-1/2"thick insulation. 2) Add 1/2"thickness to piping insulation installed exposed to outdoor air. c. Flexible Unicellular: Insulation thickness (in inches) shall comply with the following table; MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 Pipe 1"and 1-1/4" Sizes less to 1-1/2" Thickness 1 1-1/2 1) Runouts not exceeding 12' in length to individual terminal units shall have 1"thick insulation. 2) Add 1/2"thickness to piping insulation installed exposed to outdoor air. C. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: A. All ductwork systems requiring insulatin shall be exterior wrapped. No duct liners shall be used. B. Cold Ductwork(Below Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold ductwork: a Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet. b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet. 1) Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers. c. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC unit inlet; except omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums. d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lines. 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation. Increase insulation thicknesses by 1/2" where insulation is installed in areas subject to ambient and above conditions such as insulation installed out doors and insulation installed in non-return air plenums: a Rigid Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick increase thickness to 2" in non-conditioned spaces. b. Flexible Fiberglass: 1-1/2"thick, application limited to concealed locations. c. Cellular Glass: 2-1/2"thick. d. Flexible Unicellular: 1"thick. C. Hot Ductwork (Above Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot ductwork: a Hot supply and return ductwork between fan discharge, or heating unit discharge, and room terminal outlet; except omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums. c. Heating plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined. 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a Rigid Fiberglass: 2"thick. b. Flexible Fiberglass: 2"thick, application limited to concealed locations. c. Calcium Silicate: 3"thick. Use for range and hood exhaust ductwork, in addition to other applications where indicated. D. Dual Temperature Ductwork: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork: a Hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlets; except omit insulation on return air ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums. 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a Rigid Fiberglass: 2"thick. b. Flexible Fiberglass: 2"thick, application limited to concealed locations. c. Calcium Silicate: 3"thick. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment: a Drip pans under chilled equipment. 2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a Fiberglass: 2"thick for cold surfaces above 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and 3" thick for surfaces 35 degrees F(2 degrees C) and lower. b. Cellular Glass: 3"thick for surfaces above 35 degrees F(2 degrees C) and 4-1/2" thick for surfaces F(2 degrees C) and lower. c. Flexible Unicellular: 1"thick. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, pre-cut or job fabricated units(at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3"wide vapor barrier tape or bank. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: A. • General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. G. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer. H. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. 3.7 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 6 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15411 -WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". 3. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". 4. "Pipe Expansion Joints". 5. "Supports and Anchors". 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes potable cold water and hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building and the extension to the utility company water service which has been brought into the project site and capped. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Valves". 2. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gauges"for thermometers and pressure gauges. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of piping system. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters that will be provided by the utility company to the site and ready for installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Water Distribution Pipe: A pipe within the building or on the premises that conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage. B. Water Service Pipe: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing system of the building served. C. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are nominal pipe size (NPS). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. 1. Product date for each piping specialty and valve specified. 2. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified below: 3. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 4. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes: 1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping"for materials, products,a nd installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification"for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store CPVC, PVC, and PB pipe and fittings where protected from direct sunlight. B. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated fixture supply, or faucet installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Backflow Preventers: a Cla-Val Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Febco d. Hersey Products, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co. f. Zurn Industries Inc, Wilkins Regulator Div. 2. Pressure-Regulating Valves: a Cash(A. W.)Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Cla-Val Co. c. Spence Engineering Co., Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. e. Zurn Industries Inc, Wilkins Regulator Div. 3. Water Meters: a Badger Meter Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries c. Hersey Products, Inc. d. Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. Corp. e. Rockwell Intl.; Measurement&Flow Control Div. 4. Relief Valves: a Cash(A.W.)Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co. d. Zurn Industries, Inc., Wilkins Regulator Div. 5. Water Hammer Arresters: a Amtrol, Inc. b. Josam Co. c. Smith(JAY R.)Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe e. Watts Regulator Co. f. Zum Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 6. Compression Fittings For PB Plastic Pipe: a Brass-Craft Sub. of Masco Corp. 7. Vacuum Breakers For Hose Connections: a Cash(A.W.)Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Conbraco Industries c. Watts Regulator Co. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Pipe and Tube: Refer to Part 3, Article "Application, General", for identification of systems where the below materials are used. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper. D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 or AWWA C115 ductile-iron pipe, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 E. PVC Plastic Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 100 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) water pipe, with belled-end fittings and compatible solvent cement. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. B. Wrought Copper and Bronze Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 Tube and ASTM B 584 Bronze Castings. C. Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, 150 psi rating, with cement mortar lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets. D. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. E. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit application; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32 TC, Lead Free Solder. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. 2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A. General-duty valves (i.e., globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section"Valves". Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article"Valve Application"for specific uses and applications for each valve specified. 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. C. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to ASME B1.20.7. D. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011, with finish to match hose connection. E. Backflow Preventer: Reduced-pressure-principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve located between 2 positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013. F. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Single-seated, direct-operated type, having bronze body with integral strainer and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. G. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed. 1. Combined Pressure-Regulating Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI 221.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief valves shall be factory set at 210 deg F, and pressure relief at 150 psi. 2.7 WATER METER A. General: Provide water meters with registration in gallons. B. Water Meter-2 Inches and Smaller: Disc type conforming to AWWA C700. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper tube for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, with minimum number of joints, below ground. B. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with rubber gasketed joints below ground, inside and outside building. C. Install PVC plastic pipe with solvent cemented joints below ground, within building. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections. C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted unless expressly indicated. D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap. I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls with sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal. J. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 per cent) downward slope towards drain point. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices conforming to MSS SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors". Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 2. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, and spring hangers, MSS Type 41 with Type 49, for individual horizontal runs 20 feet and longer. 3. Pipe roll, complete MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, support on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support to support vertical runs. C. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod Size-In. Max. Span-Ft. Max. Span-Ft. Dia.-In. Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8 D. Support vertical copper tube at each floor. E. Support plastic pipe and tubing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual". B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual". 1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping specialties before soldering and brazing. 2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide)to prevent formation of scale. 3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature. C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall,to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). 4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. a Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. 3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. B. Install shutoff valve at service entrance outside building; complete with strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C-600. Pipe below ground inside building and to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints. 3.7 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shut-off duty: Use Ball or Gate valves. 2. Throttling duty: Use Ball valves. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser services 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate valves. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution piping system completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate valves. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. 3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code. B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of he plumbing official. a Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official. B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfection procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction or, in case a method is to prescribed by the authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below: a Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure of the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 6 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities. 3.13 COMMISSIONING A. Before operating the system, perform these steps: 1. Close drain valve, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open valves to full open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. END OF SECTION 15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 7 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15420-DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Supports and Anchors. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems,including drains and drainage specialties. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification", for labeling and identification of drainage and vent piping. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer. B. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems. C. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for the following products: 1. Drainage piping specialities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI). 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate the installation flashing and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate work. C. Coordinate the installation of drains to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of piping. D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering drainage and vent systems which may be incorporated in the work include, by are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following: 1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including drains and trap primers: a Josam Mfg. Co. DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 b. Smith(Jay R.) Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. d. Zum Industries Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV for pipe, and cast-bronze, drainage pattern fittings, with soldered joints. 1. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 50-50-tin-lead solder. B. ABS Type DWV Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2661 pipe and fittings, with solvent cemented joints; DWV plastic fitting patterns shall conform to ASTM D3311.1.Solvent: ASTM D2564. C. PVC, Type DWV Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665 pipe and fittings, with solvent cemented joints;DWV plastic fitting patterns shall conform to ASTM D3311. 1. Solvent: ASTM D2564. D. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. 1. Clamps and compression gaskets: ASTM C564. E. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. 2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra-Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces. 1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564. B. ABS Plastic Sewer Pipe: ASTM D2751 pipe and fittings. 1. Solvent: ASTM D2235. C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Conform to ASTM D2729 for pipe and fittings. 1. Solvent: ASTM D2564. 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. B. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame, with cleanout plug and adjustable round top as follows: 1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns: TYPE DESCRIPTION "A" Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8 inch thick resilient floor finish. "B" Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1 inch thick terrazzo floor finish. "C" Exposed finish type, standard mill finish. "D" Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. 2. Cast-Iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns: TYPE DESCRIPTION "A" Exposed flush type, standard mill finish. "B" Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. C. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. D. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. E. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations. B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm,and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe. B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicate invert elevation. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS-ABOVE GROUND,WITHIN BUILDING A. Install copper tube with cast bronze fittings for 3 inch and smaller, drainage and vent pipe. B. Install ABS Type DWV plastic pipe and fittings for 3 inch and smaller drainage and vent pipe. C. Install PVC Type DWV plastic pipe and fittings for 3 inch and smaller drainage and vent pipe. D. Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with lead and oakum caulked joints for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe. E. Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe. F. Install hubless, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe. 3.4 PIPE APPLICATIONS-BELOW GROUND,WITHIN BUILDING A. Install PVC sewer pipe and fittings with solvent cemented joints for 6 inch and smaller drainage pipe. 3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in AWS "Soldering Manual". B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make lead and oakum caulked joints, compression joints, and hubless joints in accordance with the recommendations in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Chapter IV. C. ABS DWV Pipe: Joining and installation of ABS drainage pipe and fittings shall conform to ASM D2661. D. PVC DWV Pipe: Joining and installation of PVC sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D2665. E. ABS and PVC Sewer Pipe: Installation of underground ABS and PVC sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D2321. F. ABS and PVC Transition Joints: When joining ABS to PVC components (such as ABS building drain to PVC sewer pipe) make joints using solvent cements conforming to ASTM D3138. DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.6 INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal. H. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes, half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reduces. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. I. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. J. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 per cent) for piping 3 inch and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot(1 per cent)for piping 4 inch and larger. K. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. L. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation. 3.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. C. Install hangers at the following intervals: MAX MAX HORIZ VERT SPACING SPACING PIPE MATERIAL IN FEET IN FEET ABS Pipe 4 4 Cast-Iron Pipe 5 15 Copper Tubing DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1-1/4 inch and smaller 6 10 Copper Tubing 1-1/2 inch and larger 10 10 PVC Pipe 4 4 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and: 1. As required by plumbing code. 2. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. At minimum intervals of 50'for piping 4"and smaller and 100'for larger piping. 4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack. B. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated. C. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes. D. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing code. B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official. a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their raps filled with water,their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1"water column. Use a"U"tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Clean drain strainer, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of a water based latex paint. END OF SECTION 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 15420 - 6 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15440-PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section: 1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 2. "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment". 3. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". 4. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Valves"for valves used as supply stops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people. B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but is not essential to its operation. C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function. D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or used with a fixture. E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture. F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the fixture. G. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that received and makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a general application where term "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support and equipment. H. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the fixture. L Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for lavatories, and sinks are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports are: 1. Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight to the floor. J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required to complete fixture assembly and installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes. C. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A117.1, "Buildings and Facilities -Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People", and Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act, 1968", with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of ATBCB "Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) - 185-494-187" with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in the Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing fixtures is on the proposer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products in each category, by one of the following listed for that category: 1. Water Closets: a American Standard, Inc. b. Universal-Rundle Corp. c. Eljer;A Household International Co. d. Kohler Co. 2. Lavatories: a American Standard, Inc. b. Eljer;A Household International Co. c. Kohler Co. d. Universal-Rundle Corp. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in the schedules on the drawings. Refurbish existing equipment, fixtures, etc. as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. 2.3 FAUCETS A. Faucets General: Unless otherwise specified, provide faucets that are cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish. B. Lavatory Faucets: ASME A112.18.1 M, centerset fitting, with hot and cold handles, and 1/2-gpm flow control fitting in spout. Provide lever type handles and goose neck fitting for handicapped use and where otherwise indicated. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 C. Sink Faucet, Type 1: ASME A112.18.1M, widespread fitting, with hot and cold handles and swing spout. 2.4 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with a polished chrome plated finish. B. Lavatory Supplies and Stops: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 3/8-inch by 12-inch flexible tubing riser outlet. C. Lavatory Traps: Cast-brass, 1-1/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch (as indicated or required) NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 17-gauge tubular waste to wall, and wall flange. D. Sink Supplies and Stops: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 1/2-inch by 12-inch flexible tubing riser outlet. E. Sink Traps: Cast-brass, 1-1/2-inch or 2"-inch (as indicated or required) NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 17-gauge tubular waste to wall or 1-1/2-inch or 2 inch NPS nipple to wall as indicated or required, and wall flange. F. Supply and drain plumbing service fittings not listed above shall be as specified and as scheduled or as required for the required service. G. Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be without chrome plate finish. H. Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips. I. Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips, of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings. J. Provide fittings specified as part of a fixture description, in lieu of fitting requirements above. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on Drawings. B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required: 1. Chair carriers for the following fixtures: a Wall-hanging lavatories. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards. B. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals. C. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. D. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls. E. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. F. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation. G. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture. H. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. I. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 K. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers". Match sealant color to fixture color. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 15. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls. C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and shower valves to provide proper flow and stream. D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner. END OF SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15460 -WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements". 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes induced draft gas fired water heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product date including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections. C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed. D. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following: 1. UL 174, "Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters". B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code". C. Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled. 1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and that bear the appropriate code symbols. E. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than proscribed in ASHRAE 90A, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design". 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with requirements, provide 40 gallon electric water WATER HEATERS 15460 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 heater by one of the following: 1. Electric Water Heaters: a Lochinvar Water Heater Corp. b. A.O. Smith Water Products Co. Div.;A.O. Smith Corp. c. Ruud. d. Architect approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. General: Install water heater in Attic as indicated. Set and connect units in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and maintenance. 2. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Extend relief valve discharge to water heater drain pan. Pipe drain pan to floor drain. a Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Perform the following before start-up final checks: 1. All water heaters with water. 2. Piping systems test complete. 3. Check for piping connections leaks. 4. Check for adequate combustion air. 5. Check for clear vent. 6. Test operation of safety controls and devices. B. Perform the following start-up procedures: 1. Energize circuits. 2. Adjust operating controls. 3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting. END OF SECTION 15460 WATER HEATERS 15460 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15530-REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Supports and Anchors. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications. This Section includes: 1. Pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties. 2. Special duty valves. 3. Refrigerants. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15, Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of refrigerant piping. 2. Division 15, Section "Mechanical Insulation"for pipe insulation. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include refrigerant specialties, and refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of or separately with packaged air conditioning equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for the following products: 1. Each type valve specified. 2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified. B. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment. C. Brazer's Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below. D. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,"Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 1. ANSI 831.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 3. Standard Mechanical Code. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties: REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 a Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric. b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. EATON Corporation, Control Div. d. Henry Valve Company. e. Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division. f. Sporlan Valve Company. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATION"for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver). 2.5 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant as required by the equipment manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 34. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Use Type L, or Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground, within building. Mechanical fittings (crimp or flair) are not permitted. B. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as specified in Article "CLEANING"below. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - 'The Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop. C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible. D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection. E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation. F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid line are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit. 1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated. G. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically. H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 exposed to mechanical injury. I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2"per 10 feet downward slope away from the compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs. 3. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. J. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. M. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. N. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. O. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal. Q. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: MIN. ROD SIZE NOM. PIPE SIZE MAX.SPAN-FT INCHES 1 7 36 1-1/2 9 38 Support vertical runs at each floor. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." 1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 2. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do not apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve. B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. C. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature. 3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter VI. B. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks. 3.8 CLEANING A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing, clean the tubing and fitting using following cleaning procedure: 1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician's tape. 2. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 4. Finally, draw a clean, dry,tintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings." C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new materials and products. 3.10 COMMISSIONING A. Charge system using the following procedure: 1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi. 6. Complete charging of system;using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating charge. B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut-down, trouble shooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping specialties. C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section "Project Closeout." D. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice. END OF SECTION 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15781 - PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification section, apply to work of this section. B. Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged heating and cooling units and accessories as follows. 1. Split System Package Heat Pump Units 2. Electric Heat as part of the package unit. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15030- Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work 2. Section 15891 - Ductwork 3. Section 15990 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, dimensions, required clearances, weights, furnished specialties and accessories;and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings detailing the manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 2. Submit shop drawings detailing the mounting, securing, and flashing of the roof curb to the roof structure for roof mounted components. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged heating and cooling units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Testing and rating of packaged units under 135,000 btu/hr capacity shall be in accordance with ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal. Sound testing and rating of units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal. 2. Refrigerating system construction of packaged units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 3. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of units shall be equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design". 4. Units shall be listed by UL and have UL label as a unit. 5. Units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle packaged units and components carefully to prevent damage. Replace damaged units or components with new. B. Store packaged units and components in clean dry place, off the ground and protect from weather, water, and physical damage. C. Rig units to comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading PACKAGE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 15781 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 rooftop units, and moving them to final location. 1.6 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation of roof mounting curb with roof structure as applicable. B. Coordinate roof opening locations for mechanical and electrical connections. 1.7 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not indude labor for removal and reinstallation. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each package heating and cooling unit: 1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan. 2. One set of filters for each unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not indude labor for removal and reinstallation. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion. B. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt,the following spare parts for each unit: One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan; One set of filters for each unit. C. General Description: Provide factory-assembled and tested packaged units as indicated consisting of condensing unit with compressors, condensing coils, and fan, and either an integral or remote air handling unit as scheduled, with evaporator coils, and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Capacities and electrical characteristics are as scheduled. D. Casings: Manufacturer's standard casing construction, having corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts, thermal insulation on air handling unit compartment, condenser coil guard, condenser fan guard. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. 1. The insulation on the air handling unit shall meet the Florida Energy Code requirements. Additional insulation shall be added to the unit casing if the factory supplied insulation does not meet the energy code required insulation value. E. Provide refrigerant thermal expansion valves, one for each circuit, for refrigerant control. Provide access valves in suction and liquid lines. F. Evaporator Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves or direct-driven fans; and permanently lubricated bearings. G. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings. H. Refrigerant Coils: Construct of seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded into aluminum fins, pressure and leak tested at 1.5 times the working pressure. Provide galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen. PACKAGE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 15781 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 I. Compressors: Serviceable, semi-hermetic, or fully hermetic compressors, complete with integral spring vibration isolators, internal high temperature overload protection, and crankcase heaters. J. Safety Controls: Manual reset type for: 1. Low pressure cutout. 2. High pressure cutout. 3. Fan and compressor motors overload protection. K. Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories as indicated or scheduled: 1. Low ambient control: head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to 0 degree F(-18 degree C). 2. Anti-short cycle timer to ensure a minimum of five minutes elapse between compressor cycles. 3. Provide refrigerant moisture indicators, and filter-driers for each circuit. Dryer shall have replaceable core. 4. Pump down control. 5. Hard start accessory shall be supplied as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and condition under which rooftop units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install package heating and cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Support: Install and secure roof curb to roof structure, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations and shop drawings. Install and secure roof mounted units on curb and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing. C. Electrical Connections: Refer to Section "Electrical Connections for Equipment" for final connections to equipment and installation of loose shipped electrical components. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Start-Up Services: 1. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Operating and Maintenance Training: 1. Provide services of manufacturer's service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Training shall include start-up and shut-down, servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and troubleshooting procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance. Review operating and maintenance data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division One. a Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day prior notice to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 15782 PACKAGE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 15781 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15870- POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division-15 Basic"Mechanical Materials and Methods"sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of power ventilator work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ventilators specified in this section include the following: 1. Power ventilators. a Cabinet Fan Ventilators C. Refer to Division-15 "Temperature Control Systems" sections for control work required in conjunction with power ventilators; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division-16 section for the following work;not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division-16 sections: 1. Motor starters (and disconnects where specified herein) in accordance with Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. 2. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and ventilators. a Control wiring specified as work of Division-15 for Automatic Temperature Controls is work of that section. 3. Interlock wiring between ventilator starters; and between ventilator starters and field-installed control devices unless specifically indicated otherwise on the electrical drawings. a Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 3. NEMA Compliance: Provide energy efficient motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power ventilators, including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual;in accordance with requirements of Division-1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS POWER VENTILATORS 15870 -1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 2.1 POWER VENTILATORS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard prefabricated power ventilator units of type and size indicated, modified as necessary to comply with requirements, and as required for complete installation. 2.2 CABINET FAN VENTILATORS A. Provide cabinet fan type power ventilators of type, size, and capacity as scheduled, and as specified herein. 1. Type: Centrifugal fan, belt or direct driven as scheduled. Units shall be provided for inline or ceiling mounting applications as indicated on Drawings. Provide steel housing, galvanized or finished with baked enamel paint. Provide adjustable mounting brackets for attachment. Provide capacitor-start, induction-run type motor for belt driven fans and permanently lubricated shaded pole motor with overload protection for direct drive fans. 2. Electrical: Provide factory-wired non-fusible type disconnect switch or plug in disconnect at motor in fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical connection. 3. Wheels: Provide centrifugal fan wheels either forward curved or backwardly inclined, statically and dynamically balanced. 4. Servicing: Entire internal assembly consisting of motor, impeller, and fan scroll shall be removable for inspection, cleaning and servicing with out disturbing duct connections or wiring. 5. Grille: Provide a decorative inlet grille where unit is exposed in the room or mounted in the ceiling. Grille shall be aluminum white a baked white enamel finish or a molded white plastic grille. 6. Vibration Isolation: Provide combination spring and rubber in shear vibration isolators for unit hangers and provide rubber fan and motor mounts for internal isolation. 7. Dampers: Provide gravity-actuated louvered damper in sleeve. 8. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cabinet fans type ventilators of one of the following: a Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. b. Carnes Co., Div. of Wehr Corp. c. Greenheck Fan Corp. d. Loren Cook e. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER VENTILATORS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install power ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that products service the intended function. B. Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofing, walls and ductwork, as necessary for proper interfacing. C. Ductwork: Refer to Division-15 section "Ductwork". Connect ducts to ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-16. Verify proper rotation of fan wheels. Do POWER VENTILATORS 15870 -2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. E. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free operation. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 15870 POWER VENTILATORS 15870 -3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Division 15 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on Drawings and in Schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible"for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"and NFPA 90B"Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". Comply with NFPA 96 for installation of grease ducts. C. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", Latest Revision. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All Ductwork sizes given on the contract drawings are net (free area) inside dimensions. 2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Fittings: Provide mitered elbows with each 90 deg elbow equipped with turning vanes per section "Ductwork Accessories". C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork. E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support or ductwork. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabricate ductwork in lengths not exceeding 12 feet nor shorter than 4 feet, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark section for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". All ductwork shall be constructed to pressure classification noted for each system on contract drawings. C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg for contracting tapers and 20 deg for expanding tapers. D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Division-15 section "Ductwork Accessories"for accessory requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5 per cent leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1 per cent for systems rated over 3") and noiseless(no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in truss spaces, in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with truss work and other structural elements suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Where ducts pass over electrical equipment METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 provide a drip pan and drain line to floor or guide in a conspicuous location. E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. Where ducts pas through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division-7 Section "Firestopping". F. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. G. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". H. All duct system components requiring insulation shall have exterior wrap insulation. No interior duct liners shall be used. 3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation,provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. C. Balancing: Refer to Division-15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing"for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. END OF SECTION 15891 METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15910-DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in scheduled, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 1. Dampers a Low pressure manual dampers 2. Turning vanes 3. Duct hardware 4. Duct access doors 5. Diffusers, grilles, and registers C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories;not work of this section. D. Refer to Division-15 "Temperature Control Systems" sections for control work required in conjunction with ductwork accessories ; not work of this section. E. Refer to Division-16 section for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on duct work accessories. Include disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. F. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division-16 sections: 1. Disconnects where indicated or specified herein in accordance with Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. 2. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and duct accessories. a Control wiring specified as work of Division-15 for Automatic Temperature Controls is work of that section. 3. Interlock wiring between duct accessories and field-installed control devices unless specifically indicated otherwise on the electrical drawings. a Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Codes and Standards 1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", latest edition. 2. NEC Compliance: Comply with the applicable portions of the National Electric Code, latest edition. 3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". Construct, test, and label electric heaters in accordance with UL standards. 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data induding parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. D. Wiring diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems, differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field installed wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, over 12" high use multiblade type- locking device required on single blade type. B. Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed blades for modulating control. Construct blades of 16-gauge steel, provide heavy-duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2"x 1/2"x 1/8"steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-gauge channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up. C. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers(Back Draft Dampers): Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16-gauge aluminum, provide 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9"centers. Construct frame of 2"x 1/2"x 1/8"steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft and under; 4"x 1-1/4"x 16-gauge channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with aluminum touch-up. D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Airguide Corp. 3. American Warming &Ventilating, Inc. 4. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc. 5. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 6. Penn Ventilator Co. 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 2.2 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of galvanized steel. Small: 2"radius, 1 1/2" spacing, 24 gauge. Large: 4" radius, 3 1/4" spacing, 22 gauge. Each vane shall be securely fastened to both runners. Both runners shall be screwed, bolted or welded to duct. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following: 1. Aero Dyne Co. 2. Airsan Corp. 3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 4. Barber-Colman Co. 5. Duro Cyne Corp. 6. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs, Koppers Co., Inc. 7. Hart&Cooley Mfg. Co. 8. Register&Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 9. Souther, Inc. 2.3 DUCT HARDWARE A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and extended end bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co. 2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. General: Provide where indicated and where otherwise required to gain access to control dampers, and other devices that may require servicing, duct access doors of size indicated. Where sizes are not indicated, contractor shall select size (subject to Engineer's approval) to match required servicing requirements. B. Construction: Construct of same of greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged, other side with one-handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, two-handle-type latches for larger doors. Construction and airtightness must be suitable for the duct pressure class used. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Register&Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 4. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 5. Ventifabrics, Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc.;Air Systems Div. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanged for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibration of connected equipment. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the following: 1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Flexaust(The)Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2.6 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. General: Provide diffusers, grilles, and registers of the type, size, and characteristics as scheduled in the attached data sheets. B. All exposed surfaces shall be painted. All steel surfaces shall be painted. Paint shall be manufacturer's standard enamel paint. C. All fabricated plenums for installation of supply and return air distribution shall be painted flat black where exposed to view. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be instaled. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have ben corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. E. Install electric duct mounted heaters in accordance with the heater manufacturer's installation instructions to maintain UL label. F. Install diffuser, grilles and registers in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15971 -ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-15"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electric control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Provide all control and interlock wiring required for a complete system. Provide control voltage transformers. Arrange for power connections to equipment units where required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division-15 section "Sequence of Operation" for shop drawings; not work of this section. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each electric control system, containing the following information: 1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers and control devices. 2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 4. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Include verbal description of sequence of operation. D. Samples: Submit sample of each type of furnished thermostat cover, in accordance with requirements of Division-1. E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 15971 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electric control systems which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric control systems of one of the following: 1. Barber-Colman Co.; Energy Management Div. 2. Honeywell, Inc. 3. Johnson Controls, Inc. 4. MCC Powers Process Controls; Unit of Mark Control Corp. 5. Robertshaw Controls Co.; Control Systems Div. 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of valves, dampers, thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for a complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer. Provide electric control systems with following functional and construction features as indicated. B. Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not less than formed 13-gauge galvanized steel. Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than formed 16-gauge galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8 inches. Equip dampers with motors, with proper rating for each application. 1. Secure blades to 1/2" diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware. Seal off against spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From -20 deg to 200 deg F(-29 deg to 93 deg C). 3. For standard applications as indicted, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with optional closed-cell neoprene edging. 4. For low-leakage applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 in. w.g. when damper is being held by torque of 50 inch-pounds. 5. Provide unit ventilator outside air dampers with adjustable minimum settings so that ventilation can be adjusted for each space or room. C. Damper Motors: Size each motor to operate dampers with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. 1. Provide permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains completely oil-immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors, where indicated on drawings or in operational sequence, with integral spiral-spring mechanism. Furnish entire spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 2. Equip motors for outdoor locations and for outside air intakes with "0-ring" gaskets designed to make motors completely weatherproof, and equip with internal heaters to permit normal operation at-40 deg F(-40 deg C). 3. Furnish non-spring return motors for dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., and for valves larger than 2-1/2 in, sized for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 300 inch-pounds. Size spring-return motors for running torque rating of 150 ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 15971 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 150 inch-pounds. D. Room Thermostats: Provide Honeywell programmable room thermostat Model T7300 with switching subbase. Refer to the drawings and to the PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS Section for additional requirements. 1. Provide one thermostat for each of units A/C-1 thru A/C-4 which shall be controlled as a single stage cooling, one stage heat pump unit with auxiliary electric heat. E. Fire Protection Thermostats: Provide UL-listed fire protection thermostats where indicated in main supply and return air ducts of air handling units which are rated 2,000 cfm and greater. Connect thermostats which are capable of stopping fans in event of excessive temperatures in fan control circuits. Provide thermostats with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F (42 deg C) above normal maximum temperature at their location in air handling system. Comply with requirements of NFPA 90A. Provide thermostats with the following operating features: 1. Provide manual reset type thermostats. 2. Provide automatic reset type thermostats, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control panel. Provide pilot light and reset switch on panel, clearly labeled to indicate operation of fire protection thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division-16 sections of these specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights. B. Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices. C. Wiring System: Install complete control wiring system for electric control systems. Conceal wiring except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side,and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly. D. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. 3.2 OPERATING SEQUENCE A. Control steps of heating and cooling to maintain the desired thermostat setpoint. Interlock the outside air damper motor to the control system to open the damper when the fan is running and close when the fan stops. Provide 7 day programmable time clock with weekend and holiday features and interconnect all systems to operate thru this clock 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Start-up: Start-up, test, and adjust electric control systems in presence of manufacturer's authorized representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. C. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided as work of this section. 1. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system. 3.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of electric control systems. ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 15971 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. Schedule instruction with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date. END OF SECTION 15971 ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 15971 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 15990-TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Other Division-15 Sections specify balancing devices and their installation, and materials and installations of mechanical systems. 2. Individual Division-15 system sections specify leak testing requirements and procedures. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems. 2. Return air systems; 3. Exhaust air systems; 4. Verify temperature control system operation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of air distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; 5. Sound and vibration measurement. B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air pattern at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. These are supply outlets on air terminals and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers and louvers. H. Main: Duct containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. I. Submain: Duct containing part of the systems'capacity and serving two or more branch mains. J. Branch Main: Duct serving two or more terminals. K. Branch: Duct serving a single terminal. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Agency Data: 1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below. B. Engineer and Technicians Data TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below. C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1, Section 01700. E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC are proposed. F. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB are proposed. G. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below: 1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned. 2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports. 3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs: a General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Temperature Control Systems d. Special Systems f. Sound and Vibration Systems 4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data. a General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. H. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project. TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: A Professional Engineer(either on the installer's staff or an independent consultant), registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, and having at least 3-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project. B. Agency Qualifications: 1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. 2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall be certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, certified by NEBB or AABC as a Test and Balance Engineer. C. Codes and Standards 1. NEEB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems". 2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance". 3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. D. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer and representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems. B. Test, adjust, and balance air conditioning systems, during summer season and heating systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS BALANCE A. Before operating the system, perform these steps: 1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent. 2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams. 3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installation. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness. 6. Check dampers for correct and locked position, and temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans. 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes. 8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. 9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 12. Check fan belt tension if applicable. 13. Check fan rotation. 3.2 MEASUREMENTS A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the references standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured. D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured. F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5 per cent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained. G. Take all readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings. I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 3.3 PERFORMING TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. D. Seal duct and piping, and test for and repair leaks. E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials. G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. 3.4 RECORD AND REPORT DATA A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms. B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 4 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Training 1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the information contained in the Operating and Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010. 2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/Engineer with at least 7-days prior notice. END OF SECTION 15990 TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 5 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16015- ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SYMBOLS A. In general the symbols used on the drawings conform to the Standard Symbols of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers with the exception of special systems or agencies as hereinafter noted. 1. Corps of Engineers. 2. Special Symbols as shown in schedules or legends. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS A. The following abbreviations or initials are used: 1. A/C Air Conditioning 2. AC Alternating Current 3. AB CLG Above Ceiling 4. AFF Above Finished Floor 5. AFG Above Finished Grade 6. AHU Air Handling Unit 7. AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity 8. AL Aluminum 9. AMP Ampere 10. ANSI American National Standards Institute 11. ASA American Standards Association 12. ATS Automatic Transfer Switch 13. AUX Auxiliary 14. AWG American Wire Gauge 15. BC Bare Copper 16. BIL Basic Impulse Level 17. BRKR Breaker 18. °C Degrees Centigrade 19. CAB Cabinet 20. C Conduit 21. CB Circuit Breaker 22. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers 23. CFM Cubic Feet Per Minute 24. CKT Circuit 25. CLEC Clock Equipment Cabinet 26. CLG Ceiling 27. COND Conductor 28. CONN Connection 29. CPU Central Processing Unit 30. CRT Cathode Ray Terminal 31. CSP Closed Standpipe (Sprinkler) 32. CSTC Communications System Terminal Cabinet 33. CT Current Transformer 34. CU Copper 35. CW Cold Water 36. DC Direct Current 37. DCTC Door Control Terminal Cabinet 38. DEG Degree ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS 16015 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 39. DGP Data Gathering Panel 40. DISC Disconnect 41. DO Draw Out 42. DN Down 43. DPST Double Pole Single Throw 44. EC Electrical Contractor 45. EEPTS Elevator Emergency Power Transfer Switch 46. EMT Electric Metallic Tubing 47. EO Electrically Operated 48. EOL End of Line Resistor 49. ER Existing to Remain 50. ESIC Elevator/Systems Interface Cabinet 51. OF Degrees Fahrenheit 52. FLA Full Load Amperes 53. FM Factory Mutual 54. FPS Feet per Second 55. FT Feet 56. FZ Fire Protection Zone (Sprinkler) 57. GR Ground Fault Interrupting 58. GND Ground 59. GRN Green 60. HD Heat Detector 61. HH Handhole 62. HORIZ Horizontal 63. HP Horsepower 64. HR Hour 65. HZ Hertz(Cycles per Second) 66. I C Intercom 67. CU Intensive Care Unit 68. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 69. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 70. IMC Intermediate Metallic Conduit 71. N Inches 72. IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 73. JB Junction Box 74. KV Kilovolt 75. KVA Kilo-Volt-Amps 76. KW Kilowatts 77. LBS Pounds 78. LED Light Emitting Diode 79. LT Light 80. LTG Lighting 81. MAX Maximum 82. MCB Main Circuit Breaker 83. MCP Motor Circuit Protector 84. MH Manhole 85. MC Microphone 86. MIN Minimum 87. MLO Main Lugs Only 88. MPH Miles Per Hour 89. MTD Mounted 90. MUX Multiplex (Transponder) Panel 91. MVA Mega Volt Amps 92. N Neutral 93. NEC National Electric Code ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS 16015 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 94. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 95. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 96. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 97. NIC Not in Contract 98. NF Non Fused 99. NL Non Linear 100. NO Number 101. OL Overload 102. OLS Overloads 103. OR Operation Room 104. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act 105. OS&Y Outside Screw and Yoke(Sprinkler) 106. P Pole 107. PB Pullbox 108. PNL Panel 109. PR Pair 110. PF Power Factor 111. PH Phase 112. PRI Primary 113. PROJ Projector 114. PSI Pounds Per Square Inch 115. PT Potential Transformer 116. PVC Polyvinyl Chloride 117. PWR Power 118. RMS Root-Mean-Square 119. RPM Revolutions Per Minute 120. RECEPT Receptacle 121. RSTC Radio/Sound Terminal Cabinet 122. SCA Short Circuit Amps 123. SD Smoke Detector 124. SEC Secondary 125. S/N Solid Neutral 126. SPKR Speaker 127. SPST Single Pole Single Throw 128. SW Switch 129. SWBD Switchboard 130. TEL Telephone 131. TTB Telephone Terminal Board 132. TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet 133. NEC Television Equipment Cabinet 134. TYP Typical 135. TEMP Temperature 136. UL Underwriters Laboratories 137. V Volt 138. W Wire 139. WP Weatherproof PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS 16015 - 3 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16020-WORK INCLUDED PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The work required under this Division shall include all materials, labor and auxiliaries required to install a complete and properly operating electrical system. The electrical system required under this Division consists basically of, but is not limited to the following: 1. Complete distribution system for lighting including the necessary feeders, branch circuits, lighting fixtures, control switches and receptacles. 2. Complete distribution system for power including feeders, and connections to motors and other power loads. 3. Underground feeders from Utility Company equipment to main switchgear, including necessary risers, etc. 4. A complete building ground system and special grounds as required or noted. 5. Final connections to kitchen and A/C equipment. 6. Connecting motors and manual control (unless otherwise specified). 7. Painting. (Of special equipment). 8. Complete lightning protection system. 9. Electrical specialties. 10. Furnishing and installing all necessary access panels. 11. Renovation of existing light fixtures. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION- 16020 WORK INCLUDED 16020 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16130-OUTLET BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. At all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, wall receptacles, telephone outlets, etc., standard galvanized one piece steel outlet boxes shall be provided -T&B, Steel City, Raco or approved substitution. Surface outlet boxes and conduit bodies shall be the heavy cast aluminum or iron with external raised hubs-Appleton, Crouse Hinds or approved substitution. Trim rings shall also be of one piece construction B. Outlet boxes shall be of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to the specific use and location, type of device or fixtures to be used, and number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits connecting thereto. C. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4"octagonal or 4" square X 1-1/2"deep or larger as required for number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits terminating at them. D. Switch, wall receptacle, telephone and other wall outlet boxes in drywall shall be 4" square X 1-1/2" deep. For exposed masonry, provide one piece 4" square x 1-1/2" deep wall boxes with appropriate 4"square cut tile wall covers Steel City series#52-C-49/52-C-52 or approved substitution. For furred-out block walls, provide 4" square box with required extension for block depth and required extension for drywall depth. E. All flush outlets shall be mounted so that covers and plates will finish flush with finished surfaces without the use of shims, mats or other devices not submitted or approved for the purpose. Add-a-Depth rings or switch box extension rings (Steel City #SBEX) are not acceptable. Plates shall not support wiring devices. Gang switches with common plate where two or more are indicated in the same location. Wall-mounted devices of different systems (switches, thermostats, etc.) shall be coordinated for symmetry when located near each other on the same wall. Outlets on each side of walls shall have separate boxes. Through-wall type boxes shall not be permitted. Back-to-back mounting shall not be permitted. Trim rings shall be extended to within 1/8"of finish wall surface. F. All outlet boxes that do not receive devices in this contract are to have blank plates installed matching wiring device plates. G. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Supporting devices. 1.2 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Height of wall outlets to centerline above finished floors shall be as follows, unless specifically noted otherwise. Verify with the Architectural plans and shop drawings for installing. Switches 4'-0" Receptacles 1'-4" Lighting Panels (top of Panel Trim) 6'-6" Phone Outlets 1'-4 B. Bottoms of outlets above counter tops or base cabinets shall be minimum 2" above counter top or backsplash, whichever is highest. Outlets may be raised so that bottom rests on top of concrete block course, but all outlets above counters in same area shall be at same height. It is the responsibility of this Division to secure cabinet drawings and coordinate outlet locations in relation to all cabinets as shown on Architectural plans, prior to rough-in, regardless of height shown on Division 16 drawings. C. Height of wall-mounted fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings or as required by Architectural plans and conditions. Fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture studs when supporting fixtures. 1.3 SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET A. Locate special purpose outlets as indicated on the drawings for the equipment served. Location and type of outlets shall be coordinated with appropriate trades involved. The securing of complete information for proper electrical roughing-in shall be included as work OUTLET BOXES 16130 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 required under this section of specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on all different types of outlet boxes and associated trim/plaster rings. PART 2-(Not applicable) PART 3-(Not applicable) END OF SECTION - 16130 OUTLET BOXES 16130 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16140-WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade. Switches shall be push button type to match existing. Receptacles shall be duplex grounding type. B. Coverplates for devices requiring them shall be as shown on the drawings. Receptacles and switches shall have finish specified on the drawings. All outside receptacles (weatherproof) shall be duplex grounding type with stainless steel hinged cover. All devices and coverplates in paneled walls shall have finish to match paneling. Submit for approval before ordering. C. Voltage and ampere rating of switches shall be marked on switch, and shall conform to voltage of system to which applied. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on all types of wiring devices including plates and engraving. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION- 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16190-SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount fixtures, conduit, cables, pullboxes and other equipment furnished under this Division. B. All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building, except standard ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures, and small devices may be supported from ceiling system where permitted by Ceiling Contractor, however, no sagging of the ceiling will be permitted. Supports and hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not be used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceiling suspension wires or to ceiling channels. C. This Contractor shall lay out and install his work in advance of the laying of floors or walls, and shall furnish and install all sleeves that may be required for openings through floors, wall etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, this Contractor shall furnish and install all inserts and clamps for the supporting of conduit. If this Contractor does not properly install all sleeves and inserts required, he will be required to do the necessary cutting and patching, later at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 1.2 INSTALLATION A. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place on maximum of 10 foot intervals; and hangers, supports or fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits will not be permitted. The required strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables. Horizontal and vertical conduit runs may be supported by one-hole malleable straps, clamp-backs, or other approved devices with suitable bolts, expansion shields (where needed) or beam-clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. B. Where two or more conduits one inch (1") or larger run parallel trapeze hangers may be used consisting of concrete inserts, threaded solid rods, washers, nuts and galvanized "L" angle iron, or Unistrut cross members. These conduits shall be individually fastened to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with galvanized cast one hole straps, clamp backs, bolted with proper size cadmium machine bolts, washers and nuts. If adjustable trapeze hangers are used to support groups of parallel conduits, U-bolt type clamps shall be used at the end of a conduit run and at each elbow. J-bolts, or approved clamps, shall be installed on each third intermediate trapeze hanger to fasten each conduit. C. Hangers shall be made of durable materials suitable for the application involved and shall be painted with two coats of lead and oil paint. Where excessive corrosive conditions are encountered, hanger assemblies shall be protected after fabrication by sherardizing or galvanizing, special paint or other suitable preservative methods. D. On concrete or brick construction, insert anchors shall be installed with round head machine screws. In wood construction, round head screws shall be used. An electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in brick, concrete or similar construction. In brick, inserts shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint. Where steel members occur, same shall be drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be fabricated from rust-resisting metal, or approved substitution. END OF SECTION- 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16410- ELECTRIC SERVICE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: 1. The Electrical Utility Company will provide the electrical service of the characteristics as shown on the Drawings. This Contractor's work will begin where the Utility Company's work ends. 2. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, etc., necessary for a complete approved electrical service as required for this project, including inspection and approval by the Utility and local Inspection Departments (if any) and inform the Engineer prior to energizing power lines within the structure. 3. This Contractor shall notify the Utility Company in writing, with two copies to the Architect, no later than ten (10) days after signing contracts as to when this Contractor anticipates the building power service will be required. B. Construction Facilities: 1. The facilities and equipment required to provide all electrical power for construction, lighting and balancing and testing consumed prior to final acceptance of the project shall be provided under this section of the specifications. All wiring, outlets and other work required to provide this power at the site and within the building for all trades shall be arranged for, furnished and installed under this section of the specifications including any fee, charge or cost due the utility company for temporary power installation or hook-ups. 2. Facilities shall be furnished in a neat and safe manner in compliance with governing codes, good working practices and OSHA regulations. C. Underground Electrical Service: 1. Furnish and install underground 120/240 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire service from power company wood pole to main service equipment. Seal conduit with duc-seal where entering building. 2. The underground service shall comply with all the requirements of the NEC, local Utility Company and local enforcing authority. D. Metering: 1. The necessary C.T. cabinet(s) shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Approval of the C.T. cabinet by the Utility Company must be obtained by this Contractor prior to submitting the Shop Drawings of the cabinet(s). 2. Meter(s) base shall be furnished by the Utility Company and installed by this Contractor. Metering base and conduit must be installed in accordance with the Utility Company requirements. E. Surge Protection 1. Provide and install surge suppressor on service conductors for service voltage. Surge suppressor shall be installed at main panel(s) in NEMA I enclosure. Surge suppressor shall be connected to main panel on load side of main breaker, and shall be type suitable for type of service. 2. All protector ground leads shall be attached to a single grounding lug mounted securely to and in good electrical contact, with the equipment chassis or cabinet. Suppressors shall meet the following criteria: a In line with the latest IEEE recommendations, protection should be provided for a 1.2 x 50 usec waveshape for open circuit voltage or voltage applied to a high impedance device, and 8 x 20 usec for the discharge current or current to a low impedance device. b. Peak line to ground surge current: 20,000A c. Capacitance: 2200 picofarads. d. Cycle life at 200 A, 8 x 20 usec waveform surge: 10,000 occurrences. e. Response time better than 150 nanoseconds. ELECTRIC SERVICE 16410 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 f. Maximum allowable circuit operating voltage: 385 VAC. g. Max clamping voltage 1025 volts for 200 ampere surge. h. Ambient temperature range: -40°C to+85°C. i. Lead configuration: Lines 18"black, neutral 18"white, ground 18"green. Leads shall be #10 AWG copper and shall not be extended to more than 18" factory installed length. j. Protectors shall be fused in order to remove them from the circuit on failure and an indicator light should verify component failure. Indicator lamps shall be mounted on enclosure cover. k. Surge suppressor shall be Atlantic Scientific MB-240-1-235 series or approved substitution by Microtronics, Inc. or Trans-Tector, Inc. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on: 1. Surge protection 2. Meter/C.T. cabinet if applicable. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION- 16410 ELECTRIC SERVICE 16410 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16450-GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: 1. In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated or bare copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the N.E.C. Bonding conductor through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panel grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices. 2. A main ground, bare copper conductor, NEC sized but in no case less than #2/0, shall be run in conduit from the Main Switchgear to a driven ground field outside the building. This ground conductor shall also be bonded to the main water service nearest the Main Switchgear. Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. 3. Grounding conductors shall; be so installed as to permit shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground; be installed in metal conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at each end; have connections accessible for inspection and made with approved solderless connectors brazed (or bolted) to the equipment or structure to be grounded; in NO case be a current carrying conductor; have a green jacket unless it is bare copper; be run in conduit with power and branch circuit conductors. The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods and water pipe. 4. All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal to metal contact. 5. Mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets and shall be manufactured by Anderson, Buchanan, Thomas & Betts Co., or Burndy. 6. All exterior grade mounted equipment shall have their enclosures grounded directly to a separate driven ground at the equipment in addition to the building ground connection. B. All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. Grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. Grounding conductors run with feeders shall be bare only. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on ground rods, ground wire, ground connectors and data on exothermic weld. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION - 16450 GROUNDING 16450 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16470 -PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Panelboards shall be of deadfront design equipped with plug-in, quick-make, quick-break circuit breakers of the thermal magnetic type and mains with lugs or main breakers as shown on Panel Schedule. Panel bus shall be tin plated copper. Bus shall be braced for a minimum capacity equal to or greater than the lowest breaker symmetrical interrupted capacity. Double and triple pole breakers shall be of the common trip, single handle type. B. Cabinets shall be surface or flush-mounted as shown on the drawings, constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized or bonderized to prevent rust. C. Size of wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards Publication No. PBI 57 and UL Standards No. 67. Cabinets shall be minimum 20"wide for all panels. D. Panels and breakers shall be rated for voltage and class of service to which applied. Panels shall have lock and shall be keyed alike. E. Panels shall be supplied with standard baked enamel finish, both cabinets and front, except flush panels shall have galvanized cabinets. F. All panelboard cabinets shall have a system grounding bar boned to the panelboard cabinet for connection of system grounding conductors. This bar shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the neutral bar./ Panel fronts on flush panels shall have completely concealed trim clamps and door hinges. Install four 3/4" conduit from flush panels to ceiling space (for future use). G. Mount a typewritten directory showing the actual circuit numbers, type of load and room names on inside of door. Room names shall be actual names or numbers used, not necessarily on the Drawings. Progress Drawings shall show same arrangement as the Directory. 1.2 CHECK-OUT MEMO A. Submit Check-out Memo from Panel Representative. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and shop drawings: 1. Product data shall be submitted on: a Panel b. Cabinet c. Bus d. Construction e. Dimensions 2. Shop drawings shall be submitted for each and every panel, each and every panel drawing shall clearly indicate the following information: a U. L. Label b. Each circuit breaker amperage rating, circuit number and position/location in panel c. Electrical characteristics of panel d. Mains rating e. Main device rating f. Mounting g. Dimensions-width, depth and height h. Bus material i. Interrupting capacity of minimum rated breaker j. Panel type PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 PART 3-EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION- 16470 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16475-OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: 1. Connections of all items using electric power shall be included under this division of the specifications, including necessary wire, conduit, circuit protection, disconnects and accessories. Securing of roughing-in drawings and connection information for equipment involved shall also be included under this division. See other divisions for specifications for electrically operated equipment. 2. Provide overcurrent protection for all wiring and equipment in accordance with the NEC, all federal, state and local codes as required and/or as shown on the drawings. 3. Should the electrical contractor disagree with the size of or application of, an overcurrent protection device called for on the drawings, he shall bring it to the attention of the Engineer immediately. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data: 1. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate: a Frame sizes and interrupting capacity of all circuit breakers. b. Horsepower ratings of rated voltage of fused switches and/or circuit breakers. c. Size and type of fuses being furnished. d. Device is U.L. Listed, and bears the U.L. Label. e. Device complies with these specifications, drawings, and applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and ASA. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: 1. Circuit breakers for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be plug-in type. 2. Circuit breakers for switchboards and/or power panelboards shall be bolt-in. 3. All circuit breakers shall be molded-case, quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic type, and shall be U.L. listed and rated for voltage and class of service to which applied. 4. Double and triple pole breakers shall be of the common trip, single handle type. 5. Circuit breakers shall have minimum rating of 10,000 amp interrupting capacity, unless noted or required otherwise on drawings and/or by these specifications. 2.2 FUSES A. General: 1. All fuses shall be of the same manufacture to retain selectability as designed. No fuse shall be installed until equipment is ready to be energized and after tightening of all electrical connections, inspection of all ground and grounding conductors and a megger test of adequate insulation to ground of all circuits. 2. All fuses shall be current-limiting with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity. 3. Fuses rated 601 amperes and larger shall be UL Class L and have a minimum time-delay of 45 seconds at 300%rating and have 0-ring gas seals at the end bells. 4. Fuses rated 600 amperes or less, installed ahead of circuit breakers or circuit breaker panels, shall be UL Class K-1. 5. Fuses rated 600 amperes or less for all general power circuits shall be dual-element, UL Class K-5 time-delay type.They shall be self protecting from extraneous heat. 6. Fuses installed in individual motor circuits shall be dual element time-delay type, UL Class K-5. Use fuse reducers when fuse clip spacing is larger than the fuse dimension. 7. Fuses called for to be rejection type are to have rejection fuse holders. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 B. Spare Fuse Cabinet: 1. Ten percent(minimum of three)of each size and type of fuse shall be placed in a spare fuse cabinet, wall mounted near the electric service. 2. Cabinet shall be sized as required to store all fuses neatly. Cabinet shall contain shelfs and/or slots as required to separate types of fuses. Cabinet door shall be hinged with latch. C. Identification Label: 1. A fuse identification label, showing type and size, shall be placed inside the door of each fused switch. 2. Labeling for rejection type fused switches shall read "Warning-Use Only Current Limiting Fuses Class , Type , MFR ," engraved in red laminated plastic. PART 3- EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION- 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16490-DISCONNECTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type, unless specifically noted otherwise. Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible and sized as noted on the drawings. B. Switches shall be 240 volt rated on systems up to and including 120/208V and 600V rated on higher voltage systems with NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise noted. All switches for motors shall be dual horsepower rated. All switches mounted outdoors shall be NEMA Type 3R. C. Provide and install lugs on disconnect switch as required to accept conductors called for on drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on all major types of disconnects. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION(Not applicable) END OF SECTION - 16490 DISCONNECTS 16490 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16500-SECURITY SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the design and installation of a complete security system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections for approval by the Architect. Do not order materials or begin work without written approval by the Architect of a system design and specifications. B. Proposal for system including: 1. Description of system. 2. Drawings illustrating component locations. 3. Product data for each component specified. 4. Warranties. 5. Total cost of complete system installed including testing and adjustment. . 6. Proposal for monitoring the system after installation. 7. References. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain security system components from one source. B. References: Provide a list of installations complete with the names and telephone numbers of the owners of the systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SECURITY SYSTEM A. General: Provide a system which will monitor the house for smoke, excessive heat and unauthorized entry. 1. Installation of the system will be temporary and will be replaced when the interior of the house is renovated. 2. The system should require little or no modification to the existing house. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in locations and at heights to comply with the Architect approved design and specifications. B. Testing: Test system for proper operation and make any adjustments or replacements as required for a properly operating system. 3.2 FINAL SUBMITTAL A. Submit as-built drawings, including product data on the completed system. B. Submit a copy of the warranty. C. Review the system on site with an owners representative. Explain proper operation and maintainance of the system. END OF SECTION 16500 SECURITY SYSTEM 16500-1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 SECTION 16501 -LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: 1. Light fixtures furnished under this Division shall be furnished complete with lamps and all necessary trim and mounting hardware, and installed as shown on the drawings. 2. Light fixtures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using standard supports for outlets and fixtures. 3. Existing light fixtures scheduled for renovation and reuse shall meet all requirements of the NEC. 4. Lamps shall be included in the system guarantee for a period of thirty (30) days after final acceptance of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Shop Drawings: a Shop drawings shall be submitted for all fixtures that require modifications either as specified or as required to fit this projects' architectural field conditions (i.e. rewiring, wall/slot fixtures, special fixtures). b. Shop drawings shall be complete showing all dimensions and installation instructions required for this projects' architectural/field conditions. 2. Product Data: a Product data shall be submitted for all light fixtures showing: 1) dimensions 2) U.L. Label 3) fusing 4) metal gauge 5) lens/louvre thickness 6) finish 7) voltage 8) lamps b. Product data shall be submitted showing manufacturer's written recommendations for storage and protection, and installation instructions. 1.3 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Physically protect fixtures against damage as recommended by manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Mercury and metallic vapor ballasts shall be auto transformer, high power factory type with renewable type KTK fuses in HEB holders. Voltages shall comply with system to which applied. Furnish ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. B. All fluorescent fixtures furnished under this Division shall be individually fused with a renewable fuse in an external GLR holder. All fluorescent ballasts shall be Class P CBM-ETL approved, and shall be of the automatic thermal resetting type, "A" rated. Furnish ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. C. All ballasts furnished under this Division shall be high power factor type and shall be covered by a two-year warranty against defects. Warranty shall include payment for normal labor costs of replacement of inoperative in-warranty ballasts. Ballasts shall be rated for voltage system to which applied. Incandescent lamps shall be rated and stamped for 130 volts. D. All lighting fixtures mounted outdoors subject to dampness and insects shall have gasketing LIGHTING FIXTURES 16501 - 1 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 material between lens door and frame to completely seal interior of fixture. Knockouts and holes in fixtures housing shall be closed and sealed. All fixtures shall be complete with lamps, shielding, brackets, concrete bases, anchor bolts and all necessary fittings and accessories for a complete installation. E. All fluorescent light fixtures four foot (or multiple of four foot) shall have lamps and ballast as follows: (This does not apply to 2 x 2 or U-lamp fixtures. F. Lamps to be 34 watt, 3050 lumen, WW as follows: 1. Watt miser II by G.E. 2. Supersaver II by Sylvania, or 3. Econowatt II by Westinghouse. G. Ballast to be compatible to above lamps as follows: 1. Mark III by Advance, 2. Maximiser II by G.E.,or 3. Watt reducer by Universal. H. Where ceiling mounted fixtures are called for in the Light Fixtures Schedule and on the drawings, this Contractor shall provide fixture trims and supports as required to match type of ceiling system which will be furnished. I. All interior and exterior light fixtures shall not have any labels exposed to normal viewing angles. This includes manufacturer labels and U.L. labels. All labels shall be concealed within the body of the fixture and/or luminaire. No manufacturers name or logo shall appear on the exterior of any light fixtures unless approved in writing by the engineer. J. All light fixtures shall adhere to U.L. Test Standard #1571 and Section #410-65C of the National Electric Code. All manufacturers shall provide the required thermal protection as required. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ducseal shall be installed to seal all conduits entering exterior light fixtures from underground. B. Install all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEC. C. Ceiling surface mounted fluorescent fixtures installed in exposed ceiling areas are to be suspended from ceiling structure with all-thread rods and 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" Kindorf channels, full length of fixture/row. Mount outlet box at structure with flexible connection to fixture. D. Coordinate fixtures installed in mechanical rooms with piping and ductwork prior to installation and relocate fixtures as required to provide proper illumination and access. be rewired with the appropriate size and type of wire. 3.2 CHECK-OUT MEMO A. Submit Check-Out Memos from the major fixture representative as determined by the Engineer. 3.3 CLEAN-UP A. Luminaires: 1. Clean free from dust and dirt. Wash lens and glassware using cleaner such as 'Windex" and dry with absorbent paper. Clean plastic per manufacturer's recommendations; do not wipe. Lenses which are kept in original containers until immediately prior to final inspection may not require cleaning. Clean "Alzak" aluminum surfaces (reflectors, fixture cones and the like) per mfr's recommendations being careful to remove finger prints and smudges. 2. It is the contractors'responsibility to remove any U.L labels or manufacturers labels from areas of fixture exposed to view and relocate label to non-obtrusive area on fixture. LIGHTING FIXTURES 16501 - 2 WITHERS-MAGUIRE HOUSE-PHASE 3 PROJECT NUMBER 9104 9/94 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE First Floor Kay Location Scope of Work 1 Parlor Obtain existing fixture from Owner, refurbish and install. 2 Hall Remove existing, refurbish and install. 3 Hall Remove and salvage existing. Provide and install fixture Type C. 4 Study Remove existing, refurbish and install. 5 Bedroom 1 Remove and salvage existing. Provide and install fixture Type D. 6 HC Restroom Remove and salvage existing. Refurbish and install fixture salvaged from Bedroom 1. 7 Rear Porch Provide and install fixture Type A. 8 Rear Porch Provide and install fixture Type A. 9 Pantry Remove existing, refurbish and install. 10 Kitchen Remove existing, refurbish and install. 11 Kitchen Remove existing, provide and install fixture Type E. 12 HC Restroom Provide and install Type E. 13 Front Porch Provide and install fixture Type B. 14 Front Porch Provide and install fixture Type B. 15 Front Porch Provide and install fixture Type B. Second Floor Key Location Scooe of Work 16 Front Porch Provide and install fixture Type B. 17 Bedroom 2 Remove existing, refurbish and install. 18 Hall Remove existing, refurbish and install. 19 Bedroom 3 Remove existing, refurbish and install. 20 Bedroom 4 Remove existing, refurbish and install. 21 Bedroom 5 Remove existing, refurbish and install. 22 Rear Porch Provide and install fixture Type A. 23 Rear Porch Provide and install fixture Type A. 24 Restroom Refurbish and install fixtures salvaged from HC Restroom. 25 Rear Stair Provide and install fixture Type A. 26 Bedroom 6 Remove existing, refurbish and install. 27 Hall Closet Remove existing, refurbish and install. 28 Attic Provide and install fixture Type A. 29 Attic Provide and install fixture Type A. FIXTURE TYPES A Porcelain Socket with bare bulb. B The Antique Hardware Store, 1 800 422 9982, swag light fixture, item number LSF1 with M5 Clear Crystal shade. Chain length and mounting location to be approved by Architect. C Troy Lighting Inc., 833 Jersey Ave., Jersey City, New Jersey, 201 653 5332, model number C8202 WT D The Antique Hardware Store, 1 800 422 9982, swag light fixture, item number LSF3 with shade A. E 36"florescent strip fixture with no shade. END OF SECTION- 16501 LIGHTING FIXTURES 16501 -3 SECTION 16940 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.01 A Lightning Protection system shall be provided and installed on the structure by an experienced installer in compliance with provisions of Code for Lightning Protection Associates System as adopted by the National Fire Protection Association and Underwriters' Laboratories. All equipment to that result shall be included whether or not specifically called for here-in. Installer shall be LPI (Lightning Protection Institute) certified, master and Journeyman in accordance with LPI Standards. A UL Master Label for the system and a witness of grounding from a similar to that required by LPI (form 175-A) shall be provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION: 2.01 Air Terminals shall be solid copper as required to match roof conductors and shall have proper base support for surface on which they are attached, and shall be securely anchored to this surface. Terminals shall project a minimum of 12" above top of object to which attached. 2.02 Roof conductors shall be copper complying with the weight and construction requirements of the Code, and shall be coursed to interconnect with air terminals, and in general, provide a two-way minimum path to ground. The angle of any turn shall not exceed 90 degrees, and shall provide an approximately horizontal or downward course. Down conductors shall be copper, and shall be provided where shown installed in PVC conduit and hidden within the structure. Radius of bends shall not less than 8 inches. Roof conductor material match and/or be computable with roof flashing material. 2.03 Conductor fasteners shall be of the same material as the conductor, having ample strength to support the conductor. Where fasteners are to be mounted in a masonry or structural work, they shall be furnished to Masonry or Structural Contractor so they may be installed during the construction of the building. 16940-1 2.04 Ground connections shall be made in accordance with the requirements of all applicable codes. Ground rods shall be placed in a minimum of two (2) feet from the building foundations. In addition to above artificial grounds, one down conductor of each two-path system shall be connected to water piping system with approved water pipe strap connector. All ground rods shall be 5/8" X 30' copper-weld type. 2.05 System shall be as manufactured by Harger or Heary Bros Lighting Protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 Installation shall be made in an inconspicuous manner with conductors coursed to conceal equipment as much as possible. Down conductors shall be concealed within equipment structure, and shall be run a minimum 1" PVC conduit. All metallic equipment within 6 feet of any lightning conductor shall be bonded to the conductor. System shall also be tied to the main service electrical ground. (END OF SECTION) 16940-2